Varycontrol Trox - Catalogo Completo

VARYCONTROL
Reference List
Design and Areas of Application
Installation
Commissioning
Maintenance
Control Components
Technical Leaflets
Reference list
VARYCONTROL
Agrippina Versicherung Daimler-Benz-Sindelfingen
Kln/G Sindelfingen/G
Autostadt Hotel Ritz, Wolfsburg Demirbank Esentepe
Wolfsburg/G Istanbul/T
Axel-Springer-Verlag Deutsche Bank Dsseldorf
Hamburg/G Dsseldorf/G
Bankhaus Lampe Deutsche Bank Mannheim
Dsseldorf/G Mannheim/G
Bausparkasse Schwbisch Hall Deutsche Lufthansa
Schwbisch Hall/G Frankfurt/G
Bayer Leverkusen DMC-Headquarter Degussa
Leverkusen/G Hls/G
Bertelsmann Erasmus-Universitt, Rotterdam
Gtersloh/G Rotterdam/NL
BHW Flughafen Bremen
Hameln/G Bremen/G
Biozentrum Frankfurt Flughafen Dsseldorf
Frankfurt/G Dsseldorf/G
Boehringer Ingelheim Flughafen Frankfurt, Terminal Ost
Ingelheim/G Frankfurt/G
Boehringer-Biberach Flughafen Friedrichshafen
Biberach/G Friedrichshafen/G
Bosch-Stuttgart Flughafen Hamburg
Stuttgart/G Hamburg/G
Bundesanstalt fr Arbeit Flughafen Mnchen I und II
Nrnberg/G Mnchen/G
Bundeskanzleramt Berlin Flughafen Warschau
Berlin/G Warschau/G
Bundesprfanstalt fr Arzneimittel Flughafen Zrich
Bonn/G Zrich/S
City Carr Magdeburg Gdeke-Freiburg
Magdeburg/G Freiburg/G
City Point Nrnberg Heidelberger Druckmaschinen
Nrnberg/G Heidelberg/G
Citybank Duisburg Henkel Z21
Duisburg/G Dsseldorf/G
CIV Europa-Parlament Brssel Hoechst-Frankfurt
Brssel/B Frankfurt/G
Commerzbank Frankfurt IBM-Heidelberg
Frankfurt/G Heidelberg/G
Condor-Versicherung Immuno Wien
Hamburg/G Wien/Aus
Daimler-Benz Dsseldorf Industriekreditbank Dsseldorf
Dsseldorf/G Dsseldorf/G
Daimler-Benz Germersheim Investbank Berlin
Germersheim/G Berlin/G
12/2001
Reference list
VARYCONTROL
KADEWE-Berlin Stadhuis Den Haag
Berlin/G Den Haag/NL
Karstadt-Bielefeld Thomae-Biberach
Bielefeld/G Biberach/G
Lufthansa-Bremen TKK-Hamburg
Bremen/G Hamburg/G
LZB Bremen TU-Eindhoven
Bremen/G Eindhoven/NL
LZB-Kiel Universitt Amsterdam
Kiel/G Amsterdam/NL
Maintower Frankfurt Universitt Mainz
Frankfurt/G Mainz/G
Merck Darmstadt Universitts-Klinikum Leipzig
Darmstadt/G Leipzig/G
MTZ-Dresden Urban-Medical-Center, Moskau
Dresden/G Moskau/R
NG-Bank Hannover Volksfrsorge
Hannover/G Hamburg/G
Office-World-Bremen WDR-Kln
Bremen/G Kln/G
OPZ-Berlin West-LB Mnster
Berlin/G Mnster/G
Pharmazentrum-Oranienburg Zentralklinikum-Dresden
Oranienburg/G Dresden/G
Provinzial-Versicherung Dsseldorf Zentral-Klinikum-Kln
Dsseldorf/G Kln/G
Queens Tower, Amsterdam ZF-Friedrichshafen
Amsterdam/NL Friedrichshafen/G
Rheinbraun-Kln
Kln/G
Roche Penzberg
Penzberg/G
Schering Berlin
Berlin/G
Sony-Center Berlin
Berlin/G
Sophia-Krankenhaus Rotterdam
Rotterdam/NL
Sozial-Versicherungsbank
Amsterdam
Amsterdam/NL
Contents
Subject Page
Volume Flow Control Terminal Units

for VAV Systems 2
Trox Scope of Supply 3
Description of Function 4
Single Duct System,
Suply Air/Extract Air Slave Control 5
Single Duct System with Reheat Coil 6
Dual Duct System Type TVM 6
Room Pressure Control 7
Duct Pressure Control 7
Explanation of Order Codes 8
Nomenclature 9
Design changes reserved All rights reserved Gebrder Trox GmbH (12/2001) Leaflet No. E016NA1
1
TVZ TVA Volume Flow Control Terminal Units

for VAV Systems
The VARYCONTROL VAV terminal units are designed for
variable air volume flow systems (VAV). The types are
selected according to various project-specific criteria:
Selection Criterion Terminal Unit Type
System Supply air

Type Single duct TVZ/TVS/TVR/TVJ/TVT
Dual duct TVM
Extract air TVA/TVR(K)/TVJ/TVT
TVM
By acoustic
criteria Very high TVZD + TS
TVAD + TS
TVMD + TS
TVJD/TVTD + TX
High criteria TVZ/TVA/TVM
Low criteria TVR/TVJ/TVT
Reduction in
duct velocity TVZ/TVA/TVS/TVM
TVR Low installation height TVR/TVJ/TVT
Chemical resistance
Coating TVR-P1/TVJ-P1
Stainless steel TVR-A2
plastic TVRK
Volume flow ranges

15 to 1680 l/s TVZ/TVA/TVS
10 to 1680 l/s TVR/TVRK
40 to 615 l/s TVM
45 to 10100 l/s TVJ/TVT
TVRK
The volume flow is controlled by a volume flow controller
which uses pneumatic or electrical energy. These con-
trollers and the associated measurement and activating
elements are integral parts of the volume flow control ter-
minal unit. The overall design of the air conditioning
system results in the VAV terminal unit being the connect-
ing element between the system and the room, with the
following functions:
to adjust the volume flow within specified tolerances
TVJ/TVT irrespective of duct pressure
as an auxiliary parameter for the room temperature
controller, to maintain a constant room temperature.
To achieve the correct control strategy, various tasks

must be noted when planning volume flow control
systems. The system designer, contractor, manufacturer
of the control system and Trox must collaborate and the
exchange of information is essential.
2
VAV System with Electronic or Trox Scope of Supply

Pneumatic Volume Flow Control The guarantee limits for VAV terminal units are set by the
control function. The diagrams show the usual control
systems used today. When a volume flow controller is
used, this limit is defined by input and output signals.
With combined room temperature and volume flow con-
trollers, this limit passes through the controller. In these
cases, the manufacturer of the VAV terminal unit guaran-
tees to maintain the volume flow, and the supplier of the
temperature controller guarantees the control of room
t Volume Flow Controller
temperature.
The scope of supply for VARYCONTROL systems

includes:
Room Temperature Controller the VAV terminal unit with its flow and acoustic proper-
ties as given in the sales literature, and the control
components ordered
installation, wiring and tubing connections of the con-
trol components mounted on the unit
volume flow adjustment and individual calibration test
of unit and control components
guarantee for the above system according to the terms
and conditions of order
technical documentation
The following are not included:

VAV System with Digital Single Room Control fixing and sealing materials
water control valves and fittings for the reheat coils
transformers, unless specified and shown on order
paperwork
pressure regulators to the operating pressure of the
pneumatic controller of 1.3 bar
The guarantee for the room temperature control system

and customer overrides in principle the responsibility of
t the building control system/BMS company. Information
Volume Flow and on power consumption, connections etc. is given in the
technical documentation from the control component
Room Temperature
Controller (DDC) manufacturer.
Trox scope of supply
Guarantee limit between Trox and system

manufacturer or manufacturer of control
components
3
Room Temperature Control Circuit Description of Function
Room Temperature Control Circuit

Control In a VAV system, the volume flow control circuit is gov-
Room
Set point deviation
temperature erned by a room temperature-dependent signal. The
controller room temperature is measured with a temperature
requirement
sensor. The room temperature controller compares the
Energy
actual value with the set value and provides an output
Effect on room
temperature
signal corresponding to the resulting energy requirement

Variable which is used as a set point signal for the volume flow
volume flow Volume flow
controller
controller. If the room temperature rises, the cooling
effect is increased by increasing the volume flow (with
cold supply air) and the room temperature held at its set
point.
Volume Flow Control Circuit Volume Flow Cascade Control Circuit

The volume flow control has a closed control circuit:
3 2 measurement comparison adjustment.
As volume measurement accuracy is essential for quality,
an optimised differential pressure sensor was developed
for the Trox VARYCONTROL VAV terminal units. Differen-
tial pressures are measured at the inlet to the multi point
flow grid. The particular arrangement of the measure-
ment points gives an amplifica-tion of the dynamic pres-
sure as a mean value. The differential pressure thus meas-
ured is a function of the volume flow and is converted
into an electrical or pneumatic signal by a transducer.
The volume flow controller determines the volume flow
from the transducer signal.
5 M pw 4 Depending on the control deviation between actual and
set values, the control damper blade is adjusted by the
actuator until the actual value and set point are equal
(P or Pl control depending on controller type). The volume
flow controller maintains a constant volume flow over the
specified pressure range within controller-dependent
1 6 tolerances. Duct pressure fluctuations cannot therefore
have a disruptive effect on the room temperature control.
1 Volume flow controller

2 Differential pressure sensor
3 Control damper blade
4 Differential pressure transducer
5 Actuator
6 Room temperature controller
4
Single Duct with Supply Air / Single Duct System

Extract Air Dependent Control The supply air volume flow controller receives a control
signal from the room temperature controller and holds
Extract Supply
air air the supply air volume flow, at the specified set value. The
controller adjusts the air quantity between the specified
Vmin and Vmax values.
Suply Air / Extract Air Slave Control

t
In individual rooms and closed office areas, the balance
TVA TVZ
TVS between supply air and extract air must be maintained to
TVR
TVJ TVR avoid whistling noises through gaps around doors etc.,
TVJ
or making doors difficult to open and close. For this, the
actual value of the supply air is monitored at the extract
air volume flow controller. Thus the extract air volume
Constant Differential Control flow in every operating situation follows the supply air.
When designing the required volume flow differences,
250 it must be ensured that the proposed controller can
l/s achieve the required constant differential or ratio control.
200
When ordering VAV terminal units, the allocation by room
Extract air volume flow
numbers must be given. This allocation must be taken

into account when the units are installed. VAV terminal
150 units types TVA, TVR and TVJ are designed for use in
normal air conditioning systems with extract air without
high dust levels and without aggressive elements in the
100 air. For extremely dusty extract air (grease, sticky dust),
membrane pressure transducers must be provided and
regular maintenance planned. For aggressive extract air,
50
volume flow controllers of suitable materials are avail-
able.
0
0 50 100 150 200 l/s 250
Order Example
Supply air volume flow (actual value)
In accordance with sales leaflet and price list for ratio
Differential 0 control:
TVR + 50 m3/h
TVJ - 50 m3/h TVZ-R/160/B13/M2-30-250 l/s
TVA -R/160/B13/S2-27-225 l/s

Ratio Control
250
l/s
200
Extract air volume flow
150
100
50
0
0 50 100 150 200 l/s 250
Supply air volume flow (actual value)
Ratio 0
Ratio + 10 %
Ratio - 10 %
5
Single Duct System with Reheat Coil Single Duct System with Reheat Coil
for LPHW Heating The room temperature controller must have two outputs
in sequence, heating and cooling. The cooling output is
Supply air connected to the volume flow controller which controls
the supply air volume flow between Vmin and Vmax. The
heating output acts directly on the water valve actuator.
The reheat coil selection can be carried out by the desi-
gner from Trox leaftets. Trox can also carry out the calcu-
t lations if the following information is given in full:
TVZ
TVS
te : air inlet temperature
TVR ta : air outlet temperature
TVJ
twm : mean water temperature
Unless specified otherwise, the heating volume is taken

Order Example as Vmin. The water control valve sizing is the responsi-
as per sales leaflet and price list: bility of the system designer.
TVZ-R-1/200/B13/E2-200-400 l/s
Dual Duct System Dual Duct System

With a dual duct system, both heating and cooling air
is available at all times for room temperature control.
Cooling takes place due to the variable cold supply air
Warm
volume flow with the warm air duct closed. In the heating
mode, the warm air volume flow is increased as required.
Cold The room temperature controller is connected to the cold
air volume flow controller.
t
TVM
Order Example
as per sales leaflet and price list: Control Diagram TVM
TVM-R-/200/B27/E2-200-400 l/s
Volume flow
Room temperature
Cold
Warm
Total volume flow
6
Room Pressure Control Room Pressure Control

In sealed rooms, as a result of control deviations, with
Extract Supply
air air supply air/extract air slave control systems, unacceptably
high room pressure differences can occur. It is therefore
recommended that the room pressure be controlled. In
the example shown, the room temperature is controlled
via variable supply air (VAV). The room pressure is also
t controlled via the extract air. The room pressure con-
TVA TVZ troller acts directly on the actuator of the extract air
TVR TVS damper. The membrane pressure transducer is connect-
TVJ TVR
TVJ ed to the room and a reference room (e.g. corridor) with
measurement tubing. The specified maximum permitted
tube length and installation position of the transducer
must be observed. If an additional extract air volume flow
Order Example
controller is integrated, the extract air volume flow may
as per sales leaflet and price list:
be limited. This avoids extreme positions on the extract
air damper (open or closed) when the doors are open or
TVZ-R-1/160/B13/E2-25-250 l/s
if there is any room leakage. This type of control is not
possible with all controllers.
TVR/160/BG3/F2- -25 Pa, Extract Air The following combinations are possible:
Supply air Extract air
Constant/variable Room pressure
positive or negative
Room pressure Constant/variable
positive or negative
The proposed application and positive or negative pres-

sure in Pa must be stated at the time of order.
Duct Pressure Control Duct Pressure Control

All single duct VAV terminal units can have duct pressure
control. A controller with a membrane pressure trans-
ducer acts directly on the damper actuator. The existing
differential pressure sensor can also be fitted with a
transducer to measure the actual volume flow for second-
ary control. The order should state the application of
supply or extract air and the pressure to be calibrated in
Order Example Pa. The reference pressure connection of the duct
as per sales leaflet and price list: pressure transducer remains open. The duct pressure
take-off is connected by the customer. The measurement
TVR/160/BH3/F2-110 Pa, Supply Air point must be selected according to flow and system
related criteria. The measurement connection must be
mounted at right angles, without burrs, and connected
via tubing to the plus (high) or minus (low) connection of
the transducer. The notes in the controller descriptions
on maximum tubing lengths, installation position must be
observed.
7
Explanation of Order Codes

The control components (controller, transmitter, actu- This table shows the connections between code num-
ators) are identified by a three point code (see price list). bers and technical basic functions.
Code Make of Volume flow Code Controller/Transmitter Application Code Actuator

control device Type Type
components Type
1 VRD2 Standard VAV-Control 1 1) SM24-V
B VRP + VFP 300 VAV-Control for polluted air 3 1) NM24-V

TVZ/TVA/TVS/TVR/
TVRK/TVJ/TVT G VRP-STP + VFP100 B AF24-V
J VRP-STP + VFP300 Room- or duct pressure control D 1) GM24-V

Belimo
B H VRP-STP + VFP600
TVZ/TVA/TVS/TVR/
TVRK/TVJ/TVT C NMV-D2 Standard VAV-Control 5 VAV-Compact
2 2 x VRD2 Standard dual duct control 7 2 x NM24-V

2 x AF24-V
TVM E 2 x VRP + 2 x VFP300 VAV-Control for polluted air 8 (spring return function)
F 2 x NMV-D2 Standard dual duct control C 2 x VAV-Compact
TVZ/TVA/TVS/TVR/
TVRK/TVJ/TVT N GLB181.1E/3 Standard VAV-Control 0 Compact controller
A 1) GBB131.1E
Siemens-Landis&Staefa
1 1) GEB131.1E
TVZ/TVA/TVS/TVR/ Standard VAV-Control, 2 1) GIB131.1E

TVRK/TVJ/TVT P ASV181.1/E for higher torque GMA131.1E
resp. Spring return function 3 (spring return function)
L GCA131.1E
4 (spring return function)
5 1) GLB131.1E
TVZ/TVA/TVS/TVR/ Standard VAV-Control, A GBB131.1E

TVRK/TVJ/TVT L PRVU digital communication 5 GLB131.1E
Y 2 x GLB181.1E/3 Standard dual duct control 0 2 x compact controller

TVM
M 2 x PRVU Standard dual duct control D 2 x GLB131.1E
Standard VAV-Control,
TVZ/TVA/TVS/TVR/
M W7751H2009
digital communication, LON-Bus 0 VAV compact controller
Honeywell
TVRK/TVJ/TVT Standard VAV-Control,

N W7751F2003
digital communication, LON-Bus 5 ML6174E2008
H
Q 2 x W7751H2009
digital communication, LON-Bus 0 2 x compact controller
TVM
R 2 x W7751F2003
digital communication, LON-Bus 6 2 x ML6174E2008
B RLE150F003
Standard VAV-Control
Sauter, elektronic
C RLE150F013
TVZ/TVA/TVS/TVR/ Room pressure / volume flow 2 ASM113F902
TVRK/TVJ/TVT J RLE150F013 + F100
cascade
6 SA1.12
C Q EYE205
digital communication
R EYE206
D RLE150F003 + RLE150F001 Standard dual duct control

TVM Standard dual duct control,
4 2 x ASM113F902
S 2 x EYE205
digital communication
A RLP10, NO, PN21
B RLP10, NO, PN61

Standard VAV-Control
D RLP10, NZ, PN21
E RLP10, NZ, PN61
N RLP100, NO, PN21

Sauter, pneumatic
TVZ/TVA/TVS/TVR/ P RLP100, NO, PN61 Standard VAV-Control,

TVRK/TVJ/TVT lower volume flow rates 1 B555DC2
R RLP100, NZ, PN21
P S RLP100, NZ, PN61
U RLP100 (NO, PN21) + RLP100
V RLP100 (NZ, PN21) + RLP100

Volume flow / room pressure
X RLP100 (NO, PN21) + RLP100 cascade
Y RLP100 (NZ, PN21) + RLP100
1 2 x RLP10 (NO, PN21) Standard dual duct control
TVM 2 2 x RLP10, (NZ, PN21) Standard dual duct control 4 2 x B555DC2

1 x RLP100F918
3 (NZ/NO, 2 x PN21) Standard dual duct control
1) for TVT only; depending of necessary torque, selected by Trox
8
Nomenclature
TVZ VAV terminal box with integrated silencer, TVJ VAV terminal box, casing rectangular
for supply air TVT VAV controller, casing rectangular, control
TVA VAV terminal box with integrated silencer, damper leakage complies with DIN 1946, part 4
for extract air TVM VAV dual duct etrminal box
TVR VAV terminal box with integrated silencer, ...-D Additional acoustic cladding
for supply and extract air
9
Installation
Contents
Subject Page
Safety Instructions 2
Delivery and Storage 3
Transport on Site 3
Reheat Coil Connections 4
Wiring and Tubing Connections 4
Secondary Silencer 4
Installation TVJ/TVT 5
1
Installation
Safety Instructions
Before installing the VAV terminal Installation and wiring should only be carried out by
units, read and observe these specialists.
installation instructions! During installation, wiring and commissioning, the nor-
mal rules of site working, in particular the safety and
accident prevention regulations, must be observed.
Because of the risk of injury from edges and burrs,
carry and install units only while wearing gloves.
Proper Application
Mount devices properly and secure fixings with locking
nuts. Suspension points must only carry the weight of
The VAV terminal units are suitable for use in ventilation
the unit. Adjacent components and connecting ducts
and air conditioning systems. Particular conditions can
must be supported separately.
restrict the functioning capacity and must be taken into
account during the design stage:
If the air is very dusty or contains fluff or sticky par- Wiring the Control Components
ticles, e.g. extract air, units with membrane pressure
The electrical connection must be made by an electri-
transducers must be used. Access to the units for
cal engineer with observation of all safety measures.
maintenance must be allowed.
Safety transformers must be used (EN 60742).
For aggressive air, only volume flow control units made
of plastic materials should be used after extensive The following regulations and conditions must be
tests for suitability. observed:
Galvanised sheet steel units must not be installed in National IEE regulations
contaminated environments (e.g. acetic acid). Health and Safety directives
Wiring instructions and circuit diagrams from
For hazardous areas, only use units with explosion-
the manufacturer of the control components.
proof electrical components.
For protected exterior areas, only use units with mem-
brane pressure transducers. Larger volume flow toler- Residual Risks
ances occur due to the wider temperature range. Under extremely rare and unfavourable conditions,
despite observation of the regulations listed, faults can
occur in the controller due to electromagnetic fields.
These can usually be remedied by screening or relo-
cating the controller.
Foreseeable damage which could occur due to the
failure of control components must be prevented in
critical cases by corresponding measures (e.g. pres-
sure relief openings in sealed rooms).
2
Installation
TVZ . TVA Delivery and Storage

Several devices are supplied on each pallet, held by
bands against sliding. TVRs are packed in non-returna-
ble containers.
Immediately after delivery, check units for complete-
ness and transport damage. If delivery is incomplete or
6 if transport damage has occured, inform the carriers
and Trox immediately.
Do not expose the units (even when packed) to the
1 4 direct effect of weather. Protect from water, direct sun-
light and dirt.
Do not store in temperatures above 50 C.
3
2 Transport on Site
5
Units should not be carried by the control components
but only by the terminal unit edges.
The differential pressure sensor in the spigot connec-
tion is a measuring instrument which is extremely
important for correct functioning, and must be handled
with particular care. Do not therefore pull on the alumin-
ium tubes of the sensors.
TVR
Installation Point
Select the installation point such that the control com-
ponents and maintenance openings remain accessible.
Do not confuse supply and extract air units. Note the
air flow direction arrow on the unit label.
Do not confuse the units for master and slave control
units (e.g. supply and extract air).
Units with membrane pressure transducers should be
4
mounted in the position shown by the label. Consult
1 Trox before fitting in other positions or moving the
3 pressure transducer.
2 For installation before and after bends, dampers or
4 other flow distortion elements, note that an increase in
flow tolerance and noise level can result.
1 Trox differential pressure sensor

2 Control components with actuator
3 Label with arrow showing air flow direction
4 Circular connection duct
5 Rectangular connection duct
6 Suspension rods (supplied by customer)
3
Installation
Reheat Coil Connections Fixing

TVZ/TVS/TVA/TVM boxes have 10.5 mm dia. mounting
4 holes on the top edge to take threaded drop rods up to
3
10 mm in diameter. The circular spigots on all boxes fit
into circular ducts to DIN 24145 and 24146. The rec-
tangular end wall on the boxes has 4 M 8 inserts with
centres that match 30 mm (TVS 20 mm) slide on frames
or suitably prepared angle flanges. The protective card-
board can be used as a drilling template for duct flanges.
TVJ/TVT has 4 corner flange holes 13 mm dia. on both
mounting flanges.
Duct Connections
Before connecting the ducts, check the inside of the
unit for damage and any loose parts, and check the
connecting ducts for contamination.
Seal the duct connections well with conventional
sealing materials.
Because of the plastic components in the immediate
vicinity of the connector, heat shrink tape should be
used with care.
Wiring and Tubing Connections

Secondary Silencer Connections Control components mounted on the unit are connected
together by cables and tubing in the factory. Each unit is
calibrated individually on an air flow test rig. The com-
plete function and direction of rotation of the actuators/
controller is tested.
Customer connections should be carried out carefully
and tested, taking into account the technical literature
issued and the project specification.
Reheat Coils
Units with reheat coils are supplied fully mounted. The
reheat coil fins are covered by a protective steel plate.
Remove the protective plate before connecting to
1 the duct. The customer must connect the flow and return
pipe connections (for 1, 2 and 4 row coils, 1 off each).
Air venting and water draining/isolation facilities must be
2 5 provided.
Secondary Silencer TS
The secondary silencers are supplied separately and
must be mounted at the point of installation directly onto
the unit or reheat coil.
1 Rectangular end wall of terminal box
Fix secondary silencer to the terminal unit end wall or
2 Inser nut M8 reheat coil using 4 x M 8 bolts.
3 Reheat coil
4 Water flow and return
5 Additional decondary silencer TS
4
Installation
TVJ with TX TVJ/TVT with Silencer TX

For aerodynamic and acoustic reasons, direct connec-
Acoustic media
tion of TVJ control units and TX silencers is not recom-
mended. To achieve the technical data as specified, a
duct section must be installed between the damper and
the silencer. The units are supplied separately and must
be mounted by the customer as shown. TX and the duct
section both have 4 corner flange holes for bolting to the
TVJ/TVT.
1 2 1
Acoustic media
TVJ/TVJD, H = 1001) mm, with TX Unit with 1001) mm Height

Acoustic media at top Acoustic media on bottom
For this height, to achieve the aerodynamic data given in
the sales leaflet, the TX must be installed as shown. Note
the unit labels relating to the installation position.
1 2
1 TVJ/TVT
2 Silencer TX
1) Also valid for the former height 107 mm
5
Commissioning
Contents
Subject Page
Function Test 2
C-Values 3
Transducer Curve 3
Volume Flow Adjustment 3
TVRK 4
1
Commissioning
Disengaging the Drive Function Test

Safety notes
Commissioning should only be carried out by spe-
cialists.
To ensure complete functioning, check the customer
connections carefully before commissioning.
The control damper blade may only be manually
adjusted using pliers when the actuator drive has been
disconnected.
The function of the volume flow control has been tested
in the Trox works. If all customer connections have been
correctly made, the system is ready for operation.
2
For function testing and commissioning:
All control components must be wired and the
wiring/tubing connections tested.
1 The duct system to the VAV terminal unit must be
complete.
The fans must be running.
The supply voltage or compressed air must be con-
nected.
1 Button for disengaging the drive The basic procedure for function testing during commis-
2 Control damper shaft with position indicator sioning is described below. Further details are given in
the VARYCONTROL Product Information under the head-
ing Control Components and the documentation from
the control component manufacturer.
Control Damper Actuator Volume Flow Controllers and Transducers

Most electric actuators can be adjusted by hand. The The volume flow controllers can only be site tested in
drive is disengaged via a button so that the blade shaft conjunction with transducers and actuators. It must be
can be turned. For larger sizes and greater pressure checked that the supply voltage or operating pressure is
differentials, high torque loadings occur. present at the terminal unit.
To avoid injury, only move the damper shaft using The controller/transducer function unit is tested by ad-
pliers. justing the actuator position by hand or through the con-
A slot in the damper shaft indicates the position of the troller. The transducer signal must change position in
blade. The direction of rotation can be reversed with accordance with the setting.
most electric actuators. However, the rotation is correctly To test the actuator, ensure that the controller opens and
set in the Trox works. If the actuator runs in one direction closes the damper blade. Further details are given in the
only, changing the direction of rotation will show whether information for the controller type concerned. External
there is a fault with the actuator. If, after changing direc- control functions are tested as specified by the controller
tion, the drive rotates in the other direction, there is a manufacturer.
wiring fault or the controller is faulty.
Dampers which are permanently open or closed may
have the following faults in addition to wiring faults:
Open
Static differential pressure too low
No air flow (fan stopped, fire damper closed)
Closed
Override position control in action
(e.g. window switch/shut off)
2
Commissioning
C-Values TVZ, TVS, TVR, TVM and TVA Transducer Curve

The transducers are calibrated in the Trox works such
Size TVZ/TVR/TVS TVM-cold TVM-tot. TVA
that the transducer output signal shown on the curve
10 6.11) agrees with the actual volume flows. This setting is
12 9.7 9.7 16.8 9.0 sealed. If the transducers are tested, the differential
16 15.9 15.9 29.1 15.2 pressure must be measured at the differential pressure
sensor. If the measuring lines contain T-pieces, a mano-
20 25.5 25.5 44 24.2
meter can be connected. If the transducer has no T-piece
25 39 39 61 38 at the effectiv pressure sensor, parallel measurement is
31 65 63 not possible. In this case, the actuator must be locked in
40 106 103 position (release wiring, program manual operation etc).
After measuring the transducer output voltage, the tubes
1) TVR only are carefully removed from the transducer connections
and the effectiv pressure measured. The volume flow is
calculated according to the formula below.
C-Values TVJ/TVT
BxH C BxH C BxH C Vl/s = C . pe in l/s
mm mm mm
200 x 100 14.8 400 x 400 146 700 x 700 415
300 x 100 21.2 500 x 400 183 800 x 700 469 Vm3/h = C . pe . 3.6 in m3/h
400 x 100 28.8 600 x 400 212 900 x 700 535
500 x 100 35 700 x 400 239 1000 x 700 597
V
600 x 100 44 800 x 400 281 800 x 800 543
900 x 400 320
: volume flow
200 x 200 30 900 x 800 636
300 x 200 45 1000 x 400 359 1000 x 800 681
pe : measured effectiv pressure in Pa
400 x 200 60 500 x 500 207 900 x 900 720
C : constant for air density = 1.2 kg/m3
500 x 200 75 600 x 500 234 1000 x 900 786
600 x 200 90 700 x 500 284 1000 x 1000 904 The accuracy for the measurement is 7 % (for TVMtotal
700 x 200 107 800 x 500 318 12 %).
800 x 200 120 900 x 500 361
1000 x 500 409
If the minimum requirements given in the leaflets for the
300 x 300 75
400 x 300 100 600 x 600 297
flow conditions are not observed, this tolerance will be
500 x 300 137 700 x 600 344 greater.
600 x 300 147 800 x 600 396
700 x 300 174 900 x 600 461
800 x 300 207 1000 x 600 508
Volume Flow Adjustment
900 x 300 228 The volume flow limit value can be changed, depending
1000 x 300 254
on controller type, by adjusting setting knobs with per-
centage scales, manual operation devices or by com-
puter. For analogue controllers, the adjustment accuracy
Measuring the Effectiv Pressure pe can be increased if the transducer signal is measured
and the volume flow set according to the voltage curve.
Ensure that the controller will actually control at
Vmin or Vmax and that the system pressure is adequate.
The DDC controller parameters are reprogrammed using
a laptop P.C. or through the network via the central com-
puter.
1 Remove test point cap and replace after

measurement
2 Manometer
3
Commissioning
TVRK Volume Flow Controller and Transducer

The TVRK plastic controllers have been developed for
the use in air-conditioning systems, where the air con-
tains agressive media. For this reason only membrane
pressure transducers are used.
Membrane pressure transducers are depending on posi-
tion (installation position to be indicated when ordering).
The intended installation position will be considered at
adjustment in the factory and is marked with an arrow.
Should another installation position be requested at site,
the zero point adjustment of the membrane pressure
transducer as per individual product information has
again to be carried out be the customer.
Transducer Curve
The differential (effective) pressure can be measured
direct at the differential pressure sensor in order to check
C-Values TVRK the membrane pressure transducer. For this purpose a
pressure gauge (manometer) is connected to the meas-
Size C-Value uring lines. The pressure gauge (manometer) can also be
connected parallely to the membrane pressure trans-
Star shaped grid Flow grid ducer. The volume flow is calculated according to the fol-
lowing formulae:
110 6.5
125 9.7 8.6
160 15.8 15.1 =C. pe in l/s
200 27 24.3
250 41 38 =C. pe . 3.6 in m3/h
315 73 62
400 116 103 1) V : Volume flow
pe : Measured effective pressure in Pa
1) From January 1997 no longer included in the delivery programme C : Constant for air density = 1.2 kg/m3
The accuracy for the measurement is 7 %.

If the minimum requirements given in the leaflets for the
flow conditions are not observed, this tolerance will be
greater.
Effective Pressure Sensors

Star shaped grid Flow grid
Delivered until Delivered from

end of beginning of
1995, approx. 1996, approx.
4
Maintenance
Contents
Subject Page
Maintenance 2
Blade Position Indicator 2
Replacement of Control Components 2
1
Maintenance
Removing tubes Maintenance
Safety Note
Maintenance should only be carried out by specialists!
The control damper mechanism on the VAV terminal unit
is maintenance-free. To ensure perfect functioning of
the entire system, function tests should be carried out as
part of the regular system maintenance.
The following criteria should be used:
1. Does the room temperature controller function?
2. Does the volume flow controller function?
3. Does the actuator turn in both directions?
4. Does the transducer output signal vary according to
the actuator movements?
5. Do the override controls such as shut off function?
1 6. Are the tubing connections airtight?
Further details on fault diagnosis are given in the infor-
mation on each controller type.
Replacement of Control Components

If faulty control components have to be replaced, the
following principles must be observed:
1 Special tool for removing tubing Spare parts must comply with the technical require-
ments of the manufacturer.
Only use original spare parts.
Blade Position Indicator Disconnect supply voltage 24 volts or operating pres-
sure.
Mark wiring/tubing connections before releasing.
Carefully remove pneumatic tubing without pulling.
Replace component and all connections.
When replacing controllers and transducers, they must

be adjusted to suit the unit size. Therefore electronic
and pneumatic components are preset in the Trox works.
Digital controllers can be set up by the customer.
When changing actuators, note the following:
5 4 3 2 1 Mechanical rotation angle limiters on the new actuator
should be set as the existing unit. A slot in the control
damper shaft shows the position of the blade.
1 VAV terminal unit 4 Rotation angle limiter
Direction of rotation should be set as before (switch or
2 Actuator 5 Control damper blade plug setting).
3 Shaft with position indicator
Measuring Equipment Required:
Electronic control Pneumatic control

Digital voltmeter Pressure gauge, 0 to 1.5 bar
Manometer, 0 to 1000 Pa Manometer, 0 to 1000 Pa
Service unit
DDC control
Service computer
Digital voltmeter
Manometer, 0 to 1000 Pa
2
Belimo VRD2
Contents
Subject Page
Area of Application 2
Volume Flow Control 4
Volume Flow Adjustment on Site 5
Volume Flow Ranges, Single Duct Units 6
Single Duct Units, Order Code, Examples 7
Dual Duct Units Series TVM 8
Terminal Connections 9
Override Controls 10
Volume Flow Control of TVM Units 11
Function Test, Commissioning 12
Design changes reserved All rights reserved Gebrder Trox GmbH (12/2001) Leaflet No. E016NL0
1
Belimo VRD2
VRD2 Area of Application

The VRD2 electronic volume flow controller from Belimo
is designed for use in VAV systems. A dynamic differen-
tial pressure transducer and electronic controller are
combined in one housing.
The principle requirements for variable volume flow con-
trol are a suitable room temperature controller or a DDC
outstation or similar. The output signal from this control-
ler serves as a command variable for the VRD2.
Switches or relays are used for override control. The
actual value of the volume flow is monitored as a stand-
ard linear, electrical signal. This signal can be used for
example to control a slave unit in the extract air duct. The
voltage range for the actual and control value is standard-
ised between 2 and 10 VDC. Using the adjuster ZEV, the
customer can change from 0 to 10 VDC.
The VRD2 has adjustment knobs for setting Vmin and
Vmax. All the controller parameters are set by Trox and the
VRD2 unit is supplied with the knobs sealed. No adjustment is
Tube connection for transducer necessary by the customer. As soon as the supply volt-
Vmin-adjustment knob (0 to 80 % of Vmax) age and the room temperature controller have been con-
nected, the volume flow control unit is ready for use. Any
Vmax-adjustment knob (30 to 100 % of VNenn)
volume flow changes which may be necessary to the
Reference value potentiometer VRD2 can easily be carried out by the customer.
Connection terminals For parallel operation, several VRD2 controllers can be
Actuator connection cable connected up to one room temperature controller. Supply
air/extract air slave control is possible.
The VRD2 is capable of communication through the PP
connection (terminal 5). With the aid of the Belimo ad-
juster ZEV, the parameter settings can be read and the
VAV Control
voltage ranges changed.
Standard filtration in air conditioning systems allows the
Room temperature use of the VRD2 in the supply air without dust protection
controller, DDC- filters. Since a small volume flow is passed through the
outstation, etc.
transducer in order to monitor the volume flow, the follow-
ing must be noted:
Command variable With heavy dust in the room, suitable extract air
filters must be provided.
Override control Window
If the air is contaminated with fluff or sticky parti-
switch, etc. cles or contains aggressive media, the VRD2
should not be used.
Slave,
Actual value
VRD2 monitoring,
etc.
2
Belimo VRD2
Characteristic of Actual Value Signal Description of Function

Vnom The volume flow is measured on the dynamic differential
pressure principle. The effective pressure pw of the
(100 %) differential pressure sensor in the terminal unit allows the
detection of a partial volume flow passing trough the
transducer. This partial volume flow which is proportional
Adjustment
Volume flow
to the total volume flow is measured, temperature com-
range
pensated and linearised with two temperature-dependent
resistors.
The measurement range is set to suit the unit size during
factory calibration, so that 10 VDC always corresponds
Vmin pub. to the unit nominal volume flow rate (Vnom ).
The signal is processed by a microprocessor. The actual
0 volume flow is available as a linear voltage signal U5.
0 2 Actual value signal U5 10 VDC The required volume flow is set by the room temperature
controller via the control signal within the limits of Vmin
and Vmax.
It is possible to select either 2 to 10 VDC (standard) or
A 2 to 10 VDC (standard) B 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 10 VDC as the voltage range for signal transmission.
U -2 U This facilitates an adjustment to the working ranges
Vactual = Vnom 5 Vactual = Vnom 5
8 10 of different room temperature controllers or DDC out-
stations. The set volume flow can be overridden using
switched controls.
The VRD2 determines the required volume flow in
accordance with the characteristic shown and compares
this with the actual value. The damper actuator is con-
trolled according to the deviation.
The Belimo volume flow controller VRD2 can only oper-
ate with the matched Belimo actuators which are opti-
Characteristic of Volume Flow Control Variable
mised for volume flow control. It is not possible to con-
nect other 3-point or 0 to 10 VDC actuators.
Vnom
(100 %)
Vmax
Volume flow
Vmin
Vmin pub.
0
0 2 Control signal U3 10 VDC
A 2 to 10 VDC (standard) B 0 to 10 VDC
Vset = U3 - 2 (Vmax -Vmin) + Vmin Vset = U3 (Vmax -Vmin) + Vmin

8 10
3
Belimo VRD2
Pressure Independent Control Characteristic Volume Flow Control

The volume flow controller works independently of
1000 the duct pressure, i. e. pressure fluctuations cause no
Pa changes to volume flow.
800 To prevent the volume flow control becoming unstable, a
dead zone is allowed within which the damper does not
Pressure differential
600 move. This dead zone and the accuracy of site measure-
ments lead to volume flow deviation V shown opposite.
400 If the conditions given in the sales brochure (static mini-
mum pressure differential, inlet flow conditions etc.) are
200 not observed, greater deviations must be expected.
20 40 60 80 100
% of Vnom
Volume flow
Vmax Vmax Setting

Vmax-set value = . 100 %
Vnom The Vmax value corresponds to the volume flow which is
set with a 10 VDC control signal or Vmax override control.
The setting range is from 30 to 100 %. The percentage
figures relate to Vnom.
V Vmin Setting
Vmin-set value = min . 100 %
Vmax The Vmin value corresponds to the volume flow which is
set with a 0 V (alternatively 2 VDC) control signal or Vmin
override control.
Vmin may be set between 0 and 80 % of Vmax The per-
centage figures relate to the Vmax volume flow setting. If
Vmin is set at 0 %, the damper will be moved to the
CLOSED position (leakage depends on the type of unit)
with a control signal of 0 V (alternatively 2 VDC).
Vmax M Vmax S Slave Control

V = The VRD2 only provides for ratio control, i.e. the sup-
min M Vmin S
ply and extract air must be in the same ratio under all
operating conditions.
The volume flow ratio is set using the Vmax adjustment
knob on the slave controller, according to the formula
Vmax S V shown opposite.
Vmax-set value = . nom M . 100 %
Vmax M Vnom S Where the volume flows are the same and the units of
equal size, the setting will be 100 %. The setting range is
from 30 to 100 %.
If Vmax set value > 100 %, the master and slave functions
must be reversed. As a rule, the Vmin adjustment knob on
the slave is set to 0 %.
4
Belimo VRD2
VRD2 Adjustment Knobs Volume Flow Adjustment on Site

The set volume flow limit values can be adjusted on site
using the Vmin and Vmax adjustment knobs on the VRD2.
Calculations are based on the formulae shown on page 4.
Adjustment Procedure
First set Vmax and then Vmin.
If the ratio of Vmax to Vmin is to remain constant (e.g.
Vmin = 50 % of Vmax), only the Vmax adjustment knob
Vmin adjustment knob must be moved.
Vmax adjustment knob Moving the Vmin adjustment knob will have no effect on
the Vmax value.
Reference value potentiometer
If Vmax is to be altered and Vmin to remain unchanged,
Vmax, must be reset first, followed by Vmin.
Important:
Calculating the Volume Flow
The reference value potentiometer Using the Actual Value Signal U5
must not be adjusted.
The accuracy of the setting can be increased if the
actual value signal U5 is also measured with the system
switched on (note the voltage range 0/10 V or 2/10 V).
As a rule, the controller must have been connected to the
operating voltage for at least 15 minutes before measure-
Formula for Vmax ments begin.
Calculate the required value for U5 at Vmax
2 to 10 VDC (standard) 0 to 10 VDC Disconnect all the wires from the terminal block, except
Vmax Vmax for terminals 1 and 2
U5 = . 8V + 2V U5 = . 10 V Insert a link between terminals 2 and 7
Vnom Vnom
Move the Vmax adjustment knob until the voltage U5
dem corresponds to the calculated value (wait approx.
2 minutes after the adjustment, then read the voltage)
Formula for Vmin Remove the link between 2 and 7
Calculate the voltage for U5 at Vmin
2 to 10 VDC (standard) 0 to 10 VDC Proceed with the Vmin setting as for Vmax
Vmin Vmin Replace the original wiring
U5 = .8V + 2V U5 = . 10 V
Vnom Vnom
ZEV Adjuster Using the ZEV to Adjust the Voltage Range

The VRD2 is factory-set to the required voltage range
(the standard range is 2 to 10 VDC). The voltage range
can only be altered by the customer using the Belimo
Operating mode
adjuster ZEV. If the ZEV operating mode selector knob is
selector knob set to const. operating mode, the VRD2 will automatically
revert to 2 to 10 VDC mode.
5
Belimo VRD2
Volume Flow Ranges TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVS

l/s m3/h
Vmin Vmax Vmin Vmax
Size
Vmin-1) to Vmin-1) to
unit
to from Vnom unit
to from Vnom
1002) 10 75 30 95 36 270 108 342
125 15 120 45 150 54 432 162 540
160 25 200 75 250 90 720 270 900
200 40 325 120 405 144 1170 432 1458
250 60 490 185 615 216 1764 666 2214
315 105 820 310 1025 378 2952 1116 3690
400 170 1345 505 1680 612 4842 1818 6048
Volume Flow Ranges TVJ/TVT

l/s m3/h
BxH Vmin Vmax Vmin Vmax
mm
Vmin-unit1) to from to Vnom Vmin-unit1) to from to Vnom
200 x 100 45 170 65 215 162 612 234 774
300 x 100 65 255 95 320 234 918 342 1152
400 x 100 85 340 130 425 306 1224 468 1530
500 x 100 105 430 160 535 378 1548 576 1926
600 x 100 130 520 195 650 468 1872 702 2340
200 x 200 85 330 125 415 306 1188 450 1494
300 x 200 125 495 185 620 450 1782 666 2232
400 x 200 165 660 250 825 594 2376 900 2970
500 x 200 205 830 310 1035 738 2988 1116 3726
600 x 200 250 1000 375 1250 900 3600 1350 4500
700 x 200 290 1160 435 1450 1044 4176 1566 5220
800 x 200 330 1320 495 1650 1188 4752 1782 5940
300 x 300 185 735 275 920 666 2646 990 3312
400 x 300 245 985 370 1230 882 3546 1332 4428
500 x 300 305 1230 460 1535 1098 4428 1656 5526
600 x 300 370 1480 555 1850 1332 5328 1998 6660
700 x 300 430 1720 645 2150 1548 6192 2322 7740
800 x 300 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820
900 x 300 555 2215 830 2770 1998 7974 2988 9972
1000 x 300 620 2480 930 3100 2232 8928 3348 11160
400 x 400 325 1305 490 1630 1170 4698 1764 5868
500 x 400 410 1630 610 2040 1476 5868 2196 7344
600 x 400 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820
700 x 400 570 2280 855 2850 2052 8208 3078 10260
800 x 400 650 2600 975 3250 2340 9360 3510 11700
900 x 400 735 2935 1100 3670 2646 10566 3960 13212
1000 x 400 820 3280 1230 4100 2952 11808 4428 14760
500 x 500 510 2030 760 2540 1836 7308 2736 9144
600 x 500 610 2440 915 3050 2196 8784 3294 10980
700 x 500 710 2840 1065 3550 2556 10224 3834 12780
800 x 500 810 3240 1215 4050 2916 11664 4374 14580
900 x 500 915 3655 1370 4570 3294 13158 4932 16452
1000 x 500 1020 4080 1530 5100 3672 14688 5508 18360
600 x 600 730 2920 1095 3650 2628 10512 3942 13140
700 x 600 850 3400 1275 4250 3060 12240 4590 15300
800 x 600 970 3880 1455 4850 3492 13968 5238 17460
900 x 600 1100 4400 1650 5500 3960 15840 5940 19800
1000 x 600 1220 4880 1830 6100 4392 17568 6588 21960
700 x 700 990 3960 1485 4950 3564 14256 5346 17820
800 x 700 1140 4560 1710 5700 4104 16416 6156 20520
900 x 700 1280 5120 1920 6400 4608 18432 6912 23040
1000 x 700 1420 5680 2130 7100 5112 20448 7668 25560
800 x 800 1300 5200 1950 6500 4680 18720 7020 23400
900 x 800 1460 5840 2190 7300 5256 21024 7884 26280
1000 x 800 1620 6480 2430 8100 5832 23328 8748 29160
900 x 900 1640 6560 2460 8200 5904 23616 8856 29520
1000 x 900 1820 7280 2730 9100 6552 26208 9828 32760
1000 x 1000 2020 8080 3030 10100 7272 29088 10908 36360
1) Vmin = 0 is also possible 2) Only TVR
6
Belimo VRD2
Volume Flow Control Tolerances 1) Single Duct Units

Volume flow V in %
as % of Vnom TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVS TVJ/TVT
Order Code / Examples
100 5 5 The available options are given in the current price list.
80 5 5
60 7 7
40 7 8 Vmin Vmax
20 9 14
10 20 >14 TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / B13 / E2 - 50 - 240 l/s
<10 >20 >14

1) Percentage figures based on Vactual TVR / 160 / 00 / B13 / M2 - 50 - 240 l/s
TVA-R / 160 / 00 / B13 / S2 - 50 - 240 l/s
Operating Mode Voltage Range

E Individual
M Master 2 = Voltage range 2 to 10 VDC
(standard range)
S Slave
0 = Voltage range 0 to 10 VDC
F Constant
Volume Flow Parameters

Operating Factory Setting
Mode
E2; E0 Vmin adjustment knob set at required Vmin

M2; M0 Vmax adjustment knob set at required Vmax
S2; S0 Vmin adjustment knob set at 0 %

Vmax adjustment knob set at volume flow
ratio to the master controller
F2; F0 V 80 % of Vnom
Vmin adjustment knob set at required
constant volume flow
Vmax adjustment knob set at 100 % (Vnom)
V 80 % of Vnom
Vmin adjustment knob set at 0 %
Vmax adjustment knob set at required
Link between terminal 2 and 4
7
Belimo VRD2
Volume Flow Ranges TVM Dual Duct Units

l/s m3/h
Size Vmin- Vmin-
Vnom Vnom
unit unit The available options are given in the current price list.
125 45 150 162 540
160 75 250 270 900
200 120 405 432 1458 Vwarm Vcold
250 185 615 666 2214
TVM-R / 160 / B27 / E2 - 50 - 240 l/s
Vwarm = Vcold
TVM-R / 160 / B27 / F2 - 400 l/s
Volume Flow Control Tolerances TVM1)

Volume flow V in %
as % of Vnom TVMcold TVM total
E Individual 2 = Voltage range 2 to 10 VDC
100 5 7 M Master (standard range)
80 5 10 0 = Voltage range 0 to 10 VDC
F Constant
60 5 12
40 7 15
30 8 17
20 9 -
10 20 -
<10 >20 -
1) Percentage figures based on Vactual
Factory Setting
Operating
Mode Cold Duct Warm Duct Controller
Controller
Vwarm 80 % of Vnom
Vmin adjustment knob set
E2 at required volume flow
Vmin adjustment V
warm
E0 knob set at 0 % Vmax adjustment knob set
M2 at 100 %
Vmax adjustment
M0 knob set at Vwarm 80 % of Vnom
F2 required volume Vmin adjustment knob set
flow (Vcold) at 0 %
F0
Vmax adjustment knob set
at required volume flow
Vwarm
Link between 2 and 4
8
Belimo VRD2
Terminal Connections Nomenclature

, - Ground, neutral
~, + Supply voltage 24 VAC or 24 VDC
w Input voltage for set volume flow U3
U/pp Output voltage U5
and communication signal
y Actuator signal
z Input for override control
IMPORTANT
The examples illustrated show the most common
Wiring
arrangements for volume flow control. The Belimo Actuator and volume flow controller are factory wired.
specifications must be observed in the overall control The 24 VAC/VDC voltage supply must be wired up by the
system design, selection of the other control com- customer. Safety transformers must be used (EN 60742).
ponents and wire sizing. If several volume flow controllers are connected to one
Details of other circuits are available from Belimo. 24 V network, it is important to ensure that a common
neutral or ground wire is used and that this is not con-
nected to other wires.
Room Temperature Control Room Temperature Control

A suitable room temperature controller or a DDC out-
RT Controller station with a 2 - 10 VDC- or 0 - 10 VDC output is con-
nected with at least two wires (terminals 1 and 3) as
shown in the circuit diagram. If there is a common 24 V
mains supply voltage, it is important to ensure that
terminal 1 on the VRD2 is also the ground for the control
signal.
Parallel Control
Several volume flow controllers (supply or extract air)
can be operated in parallel by one room temperature
controller.
If the terminal units are the same size and the Vmin and
Operating mode E, M Vmax adjustment knobs are set at the same values, all the
units control the same volume flow. If the settings differ,
the units control an equal percentage.
Parallel controller VRD2

Operating mode E, M
9
Belimo VRD2
Override Controls Override Controls

RT Controller The variable volume flow control can be overridden using
zero-potential switch contacts supplied by the customer.
This override control can be used with any controller,
All Switches Control either separately or centrally, for individual rooms or parts
open mode
of the system. If several override controls are combined,
S2 closed Closed the contacts must be linked in relation to one another, to
S3 closed V prevent short circuits. Several volume flow controllers
min
can also be actuated using one switch, if a joint ground
S4 closed Vmax wire is available and the control signal is connected in
parallel.
These circuits will only work on an AC supply voltage!
1) e.g. diode 1N 4007
Operating mode E, M
Slave Control Supply / Extract Air Slave Control (Master/Slave)

RT Controller With parallel control of the units, an undesirable differ-
ence between supply and extract air can occur if the
pressure in one duct is to low. It is therefore preferable to
use the volume flow actual value, usually of the supply
air, as the control signal for the slave volume flow con-
troller.
Master controller
Operating mode M..
Slave controller
Operating mode S..
Vmin / Vmax / Shut Off Switching

Vmin / Vmax / Shut Off Switching
By means of simple switch contacts between the supply
voltage connections and terminals 3 and 7, it is possible
to change over to different set values for the volume flow.
S1 open Vmin No control signal is necessary.
S1 closed V
max Switch S1 enables a Vmin /Vmax changeover to take place
S2 open Vmin / Vmax at the controller connected.
Using the S2 switch, several volume flow controllers can
S2 closed Closed
be actuated if a joint ground wire is available and the
control signal is switched in parallel. This means that full
shut off is given priority over Vmin /Vmax mode.
These circuits will only work on an AC supply voltage!
Operating mode E, M
10
Belimo VRD2
Supply / Extract Air Slave Control Volume Flow Control of TVM Units
for Dual Duct Unit TVM The two controllers fitted to the dual duct unit TVM (cold,
Room tempera-
warm) must be wired by the customer as shown in the
ture controller circuit diagram opposite (including the 24 VAC/VDC
cross-connection).
The room temperature controller provides the cold duct
controller with its set point signal.
In most cases, the proportion of warm air is increased
from 0 to the required Vwarm as a maximum set point.
The warm duct controller (Vtotal is measured) is therefore
Cold duct controller VRD2 set as a constant value controller and does not require
a control signal.
For a more detailed functional description, refer to the
TVM literature.
Warm duct controller VRD2

Supply / Extract Air Slave Control with
Dual Duct TVM
Operating mode M, F
The actual value output signal U5 of the warm duct con-
troller is proportional to the total volume flow Vtotal. It
can therefore be used as the control signal for a slave
Slave controller controller.
VRD2 (NMV-D2)
Operating mode S
Commissioning Signal Commissioning Connections

Room tempera- It is advisable that the signal line for connecting the ad-
ture controller juster ZEV is linked up in an easily accessible location.
This means that ceiling panels do not need be removed
Room Temperature in order to take measurements.
controller, switch
cabinet or step Suitable locations include: spare terminals in room tem-
distributor perature controller or wall mounted enclosure.
It is important to ensure that the ground (and 24 V) is also
available. Therefore, a 3-wire connection is required to
the commissioning point connection.
IMPORTANT
The commissioning connection will also work if the U5
signal is used for slave circuits or monitoring. However,
the U5 signal differs from the actual value when the ZEV
unit is connected.
Adjuster ZEV Connections ZEV Function

The indicating lights come on when the control knob
settings match the current values. To adjust the control
mode, set the mode knob, for example to 0 - 10 VDC,
and press the Set button. The volume settings can only
be read.
11
Belimo VRD2
Function Test Commissioning

Check wiring A function test for commissioning can be carried out by
Connect supply voltage measuring the actuator signal U6 (terminal 6 to 1). If U6 is
Connect air supply systems between 5.8 and 6.2 VDC, the required volume flow is
controlled. If U6 deviates from this range, wait for the
actuator to settle. If the commissioning procedure is to
Measure the actuator signal U6 include verification of the set volume flows Vmin and Vmax,
these must be set as described below. The actual value
signal U5 is measured in each operating situation (check
U6 first) and the volume flow is then calculated using the
Record actual value signal U5
for override control Vmin
formulae given on page 3 (note the voltage range).
In many cases, incorrect wiring can be the cause of the
for override control Vmax faults. Therefore a careful check should be carried out to
ensure that all connections are secure. Wires in terminals
3 to 7 should be disconnected and the actuator connec-
tion plug removed before the following checks are made.
If the actuator drive is disengaged and the damper
Fault Finding Check opened manually, the voltage U5 must increase and the
voltage U6 deviate from 6 V.
no
Wiring correct? Correct wiring error

Connect the actuator plug, link terminals 1 and 7:
yes
The actuator must close.
Change link to terminals 2 and 7: The actuator must
no
Supply voltage within Check Transformer open.

the Belimo specifications? etc.
Remove the link. The controller must control Vmin If U6 is
yes approx. 6 volts, measure U5, calculate the volume flow
no
Actual value signals U5 and compare it with the design value.

Controller faulty
and U6 consistent?
Link terminals 2 and 7: Repeat measurement for Vmax, as
yes above.
Remove link. Apply the control signal U3 . Calculate the
no
Actuator rotation correct?

Actuator opens and closes? Damper obstructed? set volume flow and compare it with the actual volume
flow.
yes
Apply the override control (terminal 7) and test the de-
no
Volume flow Vmin? Duct pressure

sired functions in sequence.
sufficient?
yes Measuring tubing to
the transducer
no
Volume flow Vmax? damaged? Replacement Controller

When replacing faulty controllers, calibrated controllers
yes
set for the terminal box type and size must be used.
no
Check room Uncalibrated controllers can only be used as a temporary

Volume flow control signal? temperature controller solution.
yes The following must be specified when ordering a replace-
ment controller:
no
Check window
Override controls?
switch, relays, etc. Terminal unit type and size and in the case of TVM
units, hot duct or cold duct controller
Operating mode
Vmin and Vmax
Order Example Replacement Controller Voltage range
Delivery date of the faulty controller
Belimo VRD2,
preset for TVR / 125 / E2 - 140 - 300 m3/h
Voltage range 2 to 10 VDC, Replacement for VRD/VRD2
12
Belimo VRP
Contents
Subject Page
Volume Flow Ranges Single Duct Units 5
Order Code, Single Duct Units 6
Volume Flow Ranges and Order Code
Dual Duct Units 7
Slave Control 9
Design changes reserved All rights reserved Gebrder Trox GmbH (12/2001) Leaflet No. E016NB1
1
Belimo VRP
VRP Area of Application

The Belimo VRP electronic volume flow controller, com-
bined with a membrane differential pressure transducer
VFP 300, is designed for use in VAV systems and re-
quires a room temperature controller.
Control signals can be in the range of 2 to 10 VDC (0 to
20 V phasecut also possible). Override control can be
achieved by external switches. Several controllers may
be connected to one room temperature controller. Supply
air/extract air slave circuits are also possible.

Static Measuring Principle
The volume flow is measured using a membrane pres-
sure transducer. Therefore the VRP is suitable for the
Controller VRP Reference value control of extract air with contaminants and/or which is
Transducer VFP 300 potentiometer dust-loden. Terminal units with painted finish or made of
min adjustment Actuator connection plastic should be considered in such situations.
knob cable
max adjustment Transducer connection IMPORTANT
knob cable In critical cases, a material test should be carried out
Offset indicating lights on the terminal unit and membrane pressure trans-
ducer, to prove suitability for chemicals and concen-
trations concerned.
Description of Function
Characteristic of Actual Value Signal
The volume flow is measured on the static differential
pressure principle. The differential pressure sensor in
nom
the terminal unit measures the effective pressure (pe).
(100 %)
U5 2 This causes a membrane in the pressure transducer to
i = nom deflect, the movement is detected and converted into a
Volume flow
8
linear pressure voltage signal. The linearisation of the
volume flow is carried out in the VRP.
factory calibration, so that 10 VDC always corresponds
min unit to the unit nominal volume flow rate (nom). The actual
volume flow is available as a 2 to 10 VDC signal (U5).
0 The required volume flow is set by the room temperature
0 2 Actual value signal U5 10 VDC controller via the control signal within the limits of min
and max. The VRP determines the required volume flow
in accordance with the characteristic shown and com-
pares this with the actual value. The damper actuator is
controlled according to the deviation. The Belimo VRP
Characteristic of Volume Flow Control Variable can only operate with the matched Belimo actuators
which are optimized for volume flow control. It is not
possible to connect other 3-point or 0 to 10 VDC actua-
max tors.
U3 2
S = (max min) + min
8
Volume flow
Gravity Dependency
Because of the weight of the membrane the positioning
of the VFP affects the measured signal. The VFP is nor-
mally calibrated for a vertical position of the membrane,
i.e. pressure tube connections above or below horizontal
min plane. Other installation positions must be specified on
order.
0
0 2 Control signal U3 10 VDC
2
Belimo VRP

1000 The volume flow controller works independently of
Pa the duct pressure, i.e. pressure fluctuations cause no
V min V max changes to volume flow
V V dead zone is allowed within which the damper does not
ments lead to volume flow deviation shown opposite.

20 40 60 80 100
% of nom
Volume flow
max Vmax Setting

max set value = . 100 %
nom The max value corresponds to the volume flow which is
set with a 10 VDC control signal or max override control.
figures relate to nom.
min Vmin Setting

min set value = . 100 %
max
The min value corresponds to the volume flow which is
set with a 2 VDC control signal or min override control.
min may be set between 0 and 80 % of max. The per-
centage figures relate to the max volume flow setting. If
min is set to 0 %, a tight shut off of the damper is not
guaranteed. The controller closes the damper until the
actual value signal is 2 VDC corresponding to 0 l/s.
Measurement tolerances mean that a leakage air flow is
present. Override control should be used for tight shut
off.
max M max S Slave Control

=
min M min S The VRP only provides for ratio control, i.e. the supply
and extract air must be in the same ratio under all
operating conditions.
The volume flow ratio is set using the max adjustment
shown opposite. Where the volume flows are the same
and the units of equal size, the setting will be 100 %.
max S nom M The setting range is from 30 to 100 %. If max set value
Vmax set value = . . 100 %
> 100 %, the master and slave functions must be re-
max M nom S
versed. As a rule, the min adjustment knob on the slave
is set to 0 %.
3
Belimo VRP
VRP Adjustment Knobs Volume Flow Adjustment on Site

using the min and max adjustment knobs on the VRP.
Calculations are based on the formulae shown on
page 3.
min max
% of max Adjustment Procedure
First set max and then min.
If the ratio of max to min is to remain constant
(e.g. min = 50 % of max), only the max adjustment
knob must be moved.
min adjustment knob Moving the min adjustment knob will have no effect
max adjustment knob on the max value.
Reference value potentiometer If max is to be altered and min to remain unchanged,
max must be reset first, followed by min.
Calculating the Volume Flow Using

the Actual Value Signal U5
The accuracy of the setting can be increased if the actual
IMPORTANT value signal U5 is also measured with the system switched
on.
The reference value potentiometer must not be As a rule, the controller must have been connected to the
adjusted. operating voltage for at least 15 minutes before measure-
ments begin.
Calculate the required value for U5 at max
Disconnect all the wires from the terminal block,
except for terminals 1 and 2
Formula for Vmax Insert a link between terminals 2 and 7
Move the max adjustment knob until the voltage U5
max corresponds to the calculated value (wait approx.
U5 = .8V+2V
nom 2 minutes after the adjustment, then read the voltage)
Remove the link between 2 and 7
Calculate the voltage for U5 at min
Proceed with the min setting as for max
Replace original wiring
Formula for Vmin Zero Point Adjustment

min It is necessary to readjust the zero point, when one of the
U5 = .8V+2V indicating lights show a measurement off limits with
nom
measurement tubing pushed off. For further information
about zero point adjustment see product information
VFP.
4
Belimo VRP
Volume Flow Ranges TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVRK

l/s m3/h
Vmin Vmax Vmin Vmax
Size
unit
to from Vnom unit
to from Vnom
1002) 15 75 30 95 54 270 108 342
125 25 120 45 150 90 432 162 540
160 40 200 75 250 144 720 270 900
200 65 325 120 405 234 1170 432 1458
250 95 490 185 615 342 1764 666 2214
315 155 820 310 1025 558 2952 1116 3690
400 255 1345 505 1680 918 4842 1818 6048

l/s m3/h
mm
200 x 100 45 170 65 215 162 612 234 774
300 x 100 65 255 95 320 234 918 342 1152
400 x 100 85 340 130 425 306 1224 468 1530
500 x 100 105 430 160 535 378 1548 576 1926
600 x 100 130 520 195 650 468 1872 702 2340
200 x 200 85 330 125 415 306 1188 450 1494
300 x 200 125 495 185 620 450 1782 666 2232
400 x 200 165 660 250 825 594 2376 900 2970
500 x 200 205 830 310 1035 738 2988 1116 3726
600 x 200 250 1000 375 1250 900 3600 1350 4500
700 x 200 290 1160 435 1450 1044 4176 1566 5220
800 x 200 330 1320 495 1650 1188 4752 1782 5940
300 x 300 185 735 275 920 666 2646 990 3312
400 x 300 245 985 370 1230 882 3546 1332 4428
500 x 300 305 1230 460 1535 1098 4428 1656 5526
600 x 300 370 1480 555 1850 1332 5328 1998 6660
700 x 300 430 1720 645 2150 1548 6192 2322 7740
800 x 300 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820
900 x 300 555 2215 830 2770 1998 7974 2988 9972
1000 x 300 620 2480 930 3100 2232 8928 3348 11160
400 x 400 325 1305 490 1630 1170 4698 1764 5868
500 x 400 410 1630 610 2040 1476 5868 2196 7344
600 x 400 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820
700 x 400 570 2280 855 2850 2052 8208 3078 10260
800 x 400 650 2600 975 3250 2340 9360 3510 11700
900 x 400 735 2935 1100 3670 2646 10566 3960 13212
1000 x 400 820 3280 1230 4100 2952 11808 4428 14760
500 x 500 510 2030 760 2540 1836 7308 2736 9144
600 x 500 610 2440 915 3050 2196 8784 3294 10980
700 x 500 710 2840 1065 3550 2556 10224 3834 12780
800 x 500 810 3240 1215 4050 2916 11664 4374 14580
900 x 500 915 3655 1370 4570 3294 13158 4932 16452
1000 x 500 1020 4080 1530 5100 3672 14688 5508 18360
600 x 600 730 2920 1095 3650 2628 10512 3942 13140
700 x 600 850 3400 1275 4250 3060 12240 4590 15300
800 x 600 970 3880 1455 4850 3492 13968 5238 17460
900 x 600 1100 4400 1650 5500 3960 15840 5940 19800
1000 x 600 1220 4880 1830 6100 4392 17568 6588 21960
700 x 700 990 3960 1485 4950 3564 14256 5346 17820
800 x 700 1140 4560 1710 5700 4104 16416 6156 20520
900 x 700 1280 5120 1920 6400 4608 18432 6912 23040
1000 x 700 1420 5680 2130 7100 5112 20448 7668 25560
800 x 800 1300 5200 1950 6500 4680 18720 7020 23400
900 x 800 1460 5840 2190 7300 5256 21024 7884 26280
1000 x 800 1620 6480 2430 8100 5832 23328 8748 29160
900 x 900 1640 6560 2460 8200 5904 23616 8856 29520
1000 x 900 1820 7280 2730 9100 6552 26208 9828 32760
1000 x 1000 2020 8080 3030 10100 7272 29088 10908 36360
5
Belimo VRP

Volume flow V in %
in % of Vnom TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVRK TVJ/TVT
80 5 5
60 7 7 . .
40 7 8 Vmin Vmax
20 9 14
10 20 >14 TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / BB3 / E - 50 - 240 l/s
<10 >20 >14

1) Percentage figures based on Vactual TVR / 160 / 00 / BB3 / M - 50 - 240 l/s
TVA-R / 160 / 00 / BB1 / S - 50 - 240 l/s
Operating mode
E Individual
M Master
S Slave
F Fixed

mode
E min adjustment knob set at required min
M max adjustment knob set at required max
S min adjustment knob set at 0 %
max adjustment knob set at volume flow
ratio to the master controller

F V < 80 % of Vnom
min adjustment knob set at required
max adjustment knob set at 100 % (nom)

V > 80 % of Vnom
min adjustment knob set at 0 %
max adjustment knob set at required
Link between terminal 2 and 4
6
Belimo VRP
Volume Flow Ranges TVM Dual Duct Units Type TVM

l/s m3/h
Size Order Code / Examples
Vmin-unit Vnom Vmin-unit Vnom
The available options are given in the current price list.
125 45 150 162 540
160 75 250 270 900 . .
200 120 405 432 1458 Vwarm Vcold
250 185 615 666 2214
TVM-R / 160 / BE7 / E - 50 - 240 l/s
. .
Vwarm = Vcold
TVM-R / 160 / BE7 / F - 400 l/s

Volume Flow Control Tolerances TVM 1)
Volume flow V in %
Operating mode
in % of Vnom TVMcold TVM total
100 5 7 E Individual
80 5 10 M Master
60 5 12 F Fixed
40 7 15
30 8 17
20 9 -
10 20 -
<10 >20 -
1) Percentages related to actual Volume Flow Parameters
Factory Setting
Operating
mode Cold Duct
Controller Warm Duct Controller
< 80 % of V
Vwarm = nom
min adjust- min adjustment knob set at
ment knob set required volume flow warm
at 0 % max adjustment knob set at
E 100 %
M max adjust-
ment knob set Vwarm > 80 % of Vnom
F at required min adjustment knob set at
volume flow 0%
(cold) max adjustment knob set at
required volume flow warm
Link between 2 and 4
7
Belimo VRP

Ground, neutral
Supply voltage 24 VAC
w1 Input voltage for set volume flow (2 to 10 VDC)
w2 Input voltage for set volume flow
(0 to 20 V phasecut)
U5 Output voltage for actual volume flow (2 to 10 VDC)
U6 Actuator signal
Plug connection to Plug connection to
z Input for override control
Transducer VFP actuator
Wiring
IMPORTANT Actuator and volume flow controller are factory wired.
The 24 VAC voltage supply must be wired up by the
The examples illustrated show the most common customer. Safety transformers must be used (EN 60742).
arrangements for volume flow control. The Belimo
specifications must be observed in the overall control If several volume flow controllers are connected to one
system design, selection of the other control com- 24 V network, it is important to ensure that a common
ponents and wire sizing. Details of other circuits are neutral or ground wire is used and that this is not con-
available from Belimo. nected to other wires.
Room Temperature Control with Override Room Temperature Control

and Parallel Control A suitable room temperature controller or a DDC out-
station with a 2-10 VDC output is connected with at least
24 VAC RT Controller two wires (terminals 1 and 3) as shown in the circuit dia-
y gram. If there is a common 24 VAC mains supply voltage,
it is important to ensure that terminal 1 on the VRP is
also the ground for the control signal.
Parallel Control
S1
Several volume flow controllers (supply or extract air) can
S2 be operated in parallel by one room temperature con-
1 troller. If the terminal units are the same size and the min
S3
and max adjustment knobs are set at the same values,
all the units control the same volume flow. If the settings
differ, the units control an equal percentage.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
VRP Override Controls
Operating mode M, E Potential-free switch contacts provided by the customer
can override the variable volume flow control. This forced
control can be applied separately for each controller (see
overleaf for examples) or centrally as in the circuit dia-
gram shown for one building section.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 S1, S2, S3 open : Room temperature control mode
VRP Parallel Controller S1 closed : Shut off
S2 closed : Constant volume flow max
Operating mode M, E S3 closed : Constant volume flow min
Diode 1N 4007
With a combination of several override controls, the
switches must be interlocked such that no short-circuits
occur. One switch can control several volume flow con-
trollers if there is a common ground and the control sig-
nal is wired in parallel. The circuits apply even if room
temperature controller with 0 to 20 V phase cut signal is
used.
8
Belimo VRP

RT Controller With parallel control of the units, an undesirable differ-
ence between supply and extract air can occur if the
air, as the control signal for the slave volume flow con-
troller.
Master Controller
Operating Mode M, E
Slave Controller
Operating Mode S
for Dual Duct Unit TVM The two controllers fitted to the dual duct unit TVM (cold,
RT Controller circuit diagram opposite (including the 24 VAC cross-
connection).
from 0 to the required warm as a maximum set point. The
warm duct controller (total is measured) is therefore set
TVM as a constant value controller and does not require a
Cold Controller control signal.
TVM literature.
Supply / Extract Air Slave Control

Warm Controller with Dual Duct TVM
The actual value output signal U5 of the warm duct con-
Operating Mode M, (E,F) troller is proportional to the total volume flow total. It can
therefore be used as the control signal for a slave con-
troller.
Slave
Controller
Operating Mode S
9
Belimo VRP

A function test for commissioning can be carried out by
Check wiring measuring the actuator signal U6 (terminal 6 to 1). If U6 is
Connect supply voltage between 5.8 and 6.2 VDC, the required volume flow is
Connect air supply system controlled. If U6 deviates from this range, wait for the
actuator to settle.
Pressure transducer zero point If the commissioning procedure is to include verification
of the set volume flows min and max, these must be set
as described below.
Measure actuator signal U6 The actual value signal U5 is measured in each operating
situation (check U6 first) and the volume flow is then cal-
culated using the formulae given on page 4.
for override control min NOTE
Record actual value signal U5 Severe vibration during transport or caused by different
for override control max installation conditions can necessitate subsequent zero
point adjustment. The procedure is described in the
Fault Finding Check product information for VFP.
Supply voltage due to Check trans- faults. Therefore a careful check should be carried out to
Belimo requirements? former etc. ensure that all connections are secure. Wires in terminals
3 to 7 should be disconnected and the actuator connec-
tion plug removed before the following checks are made.
Signals U5 and U6 Controller
consistent? faulty, replace
opened manually, the voltage U5 must increase and the
voltage U6 deviate from 6 VDC.
Actuator rotation
Actuator opening and Connect the actuator plug, link terminals 1 and 7: The
correct?
closing? actuator must close.
Damper blocked?
Change link to terminals 2 and 7: The actuator must
open.
Duct pressure
Volume flow min? Remove the link. The controller must control min. If U6 is
sufficient?
Measurement
approx. 6 volts, measure U5, calculate the volume flow
tubes to transducer and compare it with the design value.
damaged? Link terminals 2 and 7: Repeat measurement for max, as
Volume flow max? Protective wrapping above.
removed?
Remove link. Apply the control signal U3 . Calculate the
set volume flow and compare it with the actual volume
Volume flow control Check room tempe- flow.
signal? rature controller Apply the override control (terminal 7) and test the
desired functions in sequence.
Check window
Override controls?
switch, relay etc.
Order Example Replacement Controller Replacement Controller

Belimo VRP, preset for TVZ 125, 60...140 l/s When replacing faulty controllers, calibrated controllers
and VFP 300 set for the terminal box type and size must be used.
Uncalibrated controllers can only be used as a temporary
Belimo VFP 300
solution. When ordering replacement controllers, specify
min and max.
10
Belimo VRP-STP
Contents
Subject Page
Differential Pressure Control 3
Differential Pressure Adjustment on Site 3
Order Code, Examples 4
Examples 6
Override Control 6
1
Belimo VRP-STP
VRP-STP Area of Application

The Belimo VRP-STP differential pressure controller
combined with a membrane differential pressure trans-
ducer VFP 100, is designed for room pressure control
of sealed rooms; when combined with a VFP 300 or
VFP 600, it is designed for control of duct pressure. No
control signal is required if constant differential pressure
is to be maintained. The constant differential pressure
can be set manually in the range from 30 to 100 % on the
adjustment knob. Alternatively, the set value can be pre-
set externally by a control signal between 2 to 10 VDC.
Override controls can be achieved by external switches.
For parallel operation, several controllers can be con-
nected to a common control signal. Supply air/extract
duct pressure control sequence available.
Controller VRP-STP Reference value Static Measuring Principle

Transducer VFP 300 potentiometer
p adjustment knob Actuator connection sure transducer. Therefore the VRP-STP is suitable for
Transducer connection the control of extract air with contaminants and/or which
cable is dust-loden. Terminal units with painted finish or made
Offset indicating lights of plastic should be considered in such situations.
IMPORTANT
In critical cases, a material test should be carried out
on the terminal unit and membrane pressure trans-
trations concerned.
pnom
(Pa) Description of Function
U5 2
pact = pnom The differential pressure is measured on the static prin-
8
Differential
ciple. The differential pressure causes a membrane in the

Pressure
pressure transducer to deflect, the movement is detected

and converted into a linear pressure-voltage signal. The
transducer pressure range is selected and factory-set to
the measurement range required such that the differential
pmin pressure can be adjusted up or down by the customer.
0 10 VDC (100 %) always corresponds to the nominal dif-
0 2 Actual value signal U5 10VDC ferential pressure (pnom). The actual differential pressure
is measured as a 2 to 10 VDC signal (U5). The nominal
differential pressure is preset via the p adjustment
knob. For variable set values, an external 2 to 10 VDC
Characteristic of Differential signal controls the differential pressure in the range from
Pressure Control Variable 0 to pmax.
The VRP-STP determines the required pressure in ac-
cordance with the characteristic shown and compares
pmax this with the actual value. The damper actuator is con-
trolled according to the deviation. The Belimo VRP-STP
U3 2 can only operate with the matched Belimo actuators
Differential pressure
preqd = pmax
8 which are optimized for volume flow control. It is not
possible to connect other 3-point or 0 to 10 VDC actua-
tors.
Gravity Dependent
0 of the VFP affects the measured signal. The VFP is nor-
0 2 Control signal U3 10VDC mally calibrated for a vertical position of the membrane,
plane. Other installation positions must be specified on
order.
2
Belimo VRP-STP
Pressure Independent Control Characteristic Differential Pressure Control

1000 The volume flow controller works independently of
Pa the duct pressure, i.e. pressure fluctuations cause no
800 changes to volume flow.
To prevent the volume flow control becoming unstable, a
pressure (duct)
600 dead zone is allowed within which the damper does not
Differential
move. This dead zone and the accuracy of site measure-

400 ments lead to volume flow deviation shown opposite.
If the conditions given in the sales brochure (static mini-
200 mum pressure differential, inlet flow conditions etc.) are
not observed, greater deviations must be expected.
20 40 60 80 % 100
(controller set value)
pmax
pmax set value = 100 %
pnom
Adjustment Knob p Adjustment

The p adjustment knob is used to set the required dif-
ferential pressure. With variable control, the pressure can
be limited to the maximum value pmax which is held
1
constant at full control value (10 VDC).
The percentages refer to the nominal differential pressure
(pnom). The adjustment range is from 30 to 100 %.
2
p adjustment knob
Reference value potentiometer Differential Pressure Adjustment on Site
If later adjustment to the differential pressure is required,
the potentiometer is set to the new value using the for-
mula specified. The accuracy of the setting can be in-
creased if the actual value signal U5 is also measured and
the following procedure carried out with the system
IMPORTANT switched on:
Calculate U5 voltage for p
The reference value potentiometer must not be
adjusted. If control signal U5 is present set U3 to 10 VDC or set
wire bridge from terminal 2 to 4
Adjust p potentiometer until voltage U5 corresponds
to the calculated value (wait approx. 2 minutes after
pmax
adjustment, then read voltage)
U5 = 8V+2V
pnom If the VRP-STP is operated with control signal U3,
remove bridge 2 to 4 again.
3
Belimo VRP-STP
Room Pressure Ranges Order Code / Examples

Differential p The available options are given in the current price list.
pressure pmin1) from to pnom
transducer Pa Pa Pa
2.5 30 100 p
TVR / 160 / 00 / BG3 / Z - 15 Pa

VFP 100 1.5 15 50
1.5 7.5 25
TVR / 160 / 00 / BG3 / Z - -15 Pa2)
Duct Pressure Ranges TVR / 160 / 00 / BH3 / A - -250 Pa

Differential p
pressure pmin1) from to pnom
transducer Pa Pa Pa Operating mode
7.5 90 300 A Extract air
VFP 300 Z Supply air
4 30 100
15 180 600
VFP 600 Factory Differential Pressure Setting
7.5 90 300
TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVRK, TVJ, TVT
Operating mode Factory setting

Differential Pressure Control Tolerances
Differential pressure sensor of terminal
p Control tolerance Room pressure unit short-circuited
in % of pnom % control p potentiometer to pressure
difference ordered
100 > 15
< 80 > 15 Duct pressure p potentiometer to pressure
< 60 > 17 control difference ordered
< 40 > 18
< 30 > 10
< 30 > 10
Customers Fittings
Operating mode Measures
Positive room Room measuring tube to plus

pressure reference room measuring
Negative room Room measuring tube to minus

pressure Reference room measuring tube on plus
1) With a control signal the set value could be lower than 30 % Supply air duct
Duct measuring tube to plus
of pnom. But pressure diffrentials < pmin are set to 0, resp. could pressure
not be controlled stable.
Extract air duct
2) It is possible to control negative room pressure with a supply
Duct measuring tube to minus
pressure
terminal unit.
4
Belimo VRP-STP

Ground, neutral
Supply voltage 24 VAC
w1 Input voltage for set differential pressure (2 to 10 VDC)
w2 Input voltage for set differential pressure
(0 to 20 V phasecut)
Plug connection U5 Output voltage for differential pressure (2 to 10 VDC)
to actuator U6 Actuator signal
Plug connection to z Input for override control
Transducer VFP ...
Wiring
IMPORTANT Actuator and volume flow controller are factory wired.
The examples illustrated show the most common The 24 VAC voltage supply must be wired up by the
arrangements for pressure control. The Belimo spe- customer. Safety transformers must be used (EN 60742).
cifications must be observed in the overall control If several volume flow controllers are connected to one
system design, selection of the other control com- 24 VAC network, it is important to ensure that a common
ponents and wire sizing. Details of other circuits are neutral or ground wire is used and that this is not con-
available from Belimo. nected to other wires.
The control signal for the nominal value emitter has
2 cores connected to the differential pressure controller.
Room Pressure Control If the the measurement and adjustment sites are far
apart, remove the made-up plug on the actuator cable
Reference Room and extend the cable. This is easier and more reliable
Room than extending the measurement tube.
Tube Connections
Tube dimensions : di = 6 mm
Max. Lengths : 10 m
(Plus and Minus total)1)
Positive Pressure
Material : Polyurethane1)
Negative Pressure Room Pressure Control

The VFP100 has the tube connections shown for room
pressure control. The measurement points in the room
Duct Pressure Control and in the reference room must be turbulence-free (no
Supply air Extract air influence by room flow, no dynamic part pd).
Note:
If groups of rooms with different set points of differential
pressure are arranged in sequence, all transducers
Unit Unit VFP100 should work with a common reference pressure,
e.g. atmospheric pressure.
Duct Pressure Control

The tube connections for supply and extraction air differ
as shown on the sketch. The pressure connection not
used must remain open or connected to the reference
pressure via a tube.
IMPORTANT
For VAV terminal boxes for room pressure control and
required shut off:
The options supply air / room negative pressure and
extract air / room positive pressure needs a wiring
on site for damper open, so that the damper will be
closed (see page 6). 1) Recommendation
5
Belimo VRP-STP
Parallel Differential Pressure Control with Override Controls

Override Control Potential-free switch contacts provided by the customer
24 VAC Set point adjuster
can override the variable volume flow control. This forced
control can be applied separately for each controller
(see overleaf for examples) or centrally as in the circuit
diagram shown for one building section.
S1*
Shut off
S2*
S3*
Closing switch S1 (e.g. by window contact) causes the
damper to close. This override control provides shut off
for unit types TVZ/TVA/TVR while maintaining the per-
VRP-STP mitted leakage air volume flow to DIN 1946 Part 4.
Operating mode S1 open : control mode
Z, A S1 closed : shut off
S3 closed : Override Control OPEN
VRP-STP pmax Override Control

Operating mode The variable differential pressure control is interrupted by
Z, A closing the switch. Control of the maximum differential
* Switch S2 only in combination with pressure takes priority.
control signal w1 or w2 S2 open : variable control mode
S2 closed : constant pressure pmax
NOTE
Combination of Duct-Pressure and With a combination of several override controls, the
Volume Flow Control switches must be interlocked such that no short-circuits
occur. One switch can control several volume flow con-
trollers if there is a common ground and the control
Room signal is wired in parallel. The circuits apply even if room
temperature controller with 0 to 20 V phase cut signal is
used.
Parallel Control
Several differential pressure controllers can be operated
in parallel by one set point adjuster from one nominal
vatue emitter. Thus the nominal values for several rooms
or ducts can be altered simultaneously.
Example application:
Day/night switching or sliding operation. For example
several room or duct pressures can be controlled follow-
ing the same percentage values.
Extract Air Duct Pressure Control and

Supply Air Slave Control
The VRP-STP controls the pressure in the extract air duct
on the low pressure side as it acts directly on the damper
of the terminal unit. The controller VRD of the terminal
unit is used to measure the extract air volume flow.
The actual value output signal U5 for the extract air VRD
is used to control the VRD on the supply air terminal unit.
This ensures that the supply and extract air volume flows
Nomenclature are always identical or stand in the required ratio to each
1 Terminal unit, extract air other.
2 Measuring point for extract air duct pressure
3 Measuring point for extract air volume flow
4 Terminal unit, supply air
6
Belimo VRP-STP

Check wiring
Connect supply voltage measuring the actuator signal U6 (terminal 6 to 1). If U6 is
Connect air control systems between 5.8 and 6.2 VDC, the required differential pres-
sure is controlled.
If the maximum differential pressure pmax should be
Pressure transducer zero point shown for variable control, proceed as described below.
Measure the actual value signal U5 (having first checked
U6) and then determine the differential pressure from the
Measure actuator signal U6 formula on page 2.
NOTE
Override control pmax:
Severe vibration during transport or other installation
situations can necessitate subsequent adjustment of the
(Only for control signal U3 and U4) zero point setting. The procedure is described in the
product information for VFP...
Fault Finding Check faults. Therefore a careful check should be carried out to
ensure that all connections are secure. Wires in terminals
Supply voltage due to
no
Check trans- 3 to 7 should be disconnected and the actuator connec-

Belimo requirements? former etc. tion plug removed before the following checks are made

yes except link 2 to 4.
no
Signals U5 and U6 Regulator

consistent?

faulty, replace opened manually, the voltage U5 must increase and the
voltage U6 deviate from 6 VDC.

yes
Connect the actuator plug, link terminals 1 and 7: The
Actuator rotation
no
Actuator opening actuator must close.

correct?
and closing? Damper blocked? Change link to terminals 2 and 7: The actuator must
yes open.

Differential
Wire bridge from 2 to 7: the actuator must open1).
no
Duct pressure Remove the link. The controller must control min. If U6 is
pressure p?
sufficient?
approx. 6 volts, measure U5, calculate the volume flow

yes and compare it with the design value.
Measurement
no
Differential tubes to transducer

VFP... damaged?
If a control signal U3 or U4 is used, link terminal 2 and 7
pressure pmax? and repeat the measurement for pmax as before.
yes Remove the link from 2 to 4. Apply control signal U3.

Calculate the set differential pressure and compare with
no
Check position en-

Control signal coder, wire bridge the actual differential pressure.
2 to 4 removed
Apply override control (terminal 7) and test the desired
yes functions in sequence.
no

Check window
Override controls? switches, relays
etc. Replacement Controller
Order Example for Replacement Controller set for the terminal box type and size must be used.
Belimo VRP-STP and VFP300, preset for TVR 125, solution. When ordering replacement controllers, specify
and supply air duct pressure 250 Pa
pmax.
Belimo VRP-STP and VFP100, preset for TVR 125,
and negative room pressure, extract air, 20 Pa
Belimo VFP300
1) The direction can be reversed for room pressure control.
7
Belimo VFP
Contents
Subject Page
Gravity-Dependency 3
Zero Point Adjustment 3
1
Belimo VFP
VFP Area of Application

The electronic membrane pressure transducer VFP... is
designed for use in VAV systems. Combined with the
Belimo VRP controller, it is used for measuring actual
values for volume flow control and with the VRP-STP
controller, for room and duct pressure control. The
mounting and wiring and tube connections for volume
flow control are factory-fitted. The tube connections for
room or duct pressure control must be made by the
customer. The gravity-dependency must be taken into
account during installation. The correct installation posi-
tion is shown by an arrow for factory mounting. VFP... is
Tube for pressure supplied with voltage via the VRP(-STP) controller.
measurement point
Because of the static membrane measuring principle, the
VFP... is suitable for VAV-systems with contaminated air
Transducer VFP Negative pressure with fluff or sticky particles or aggressive media.
Positive pressure connection
connection Transducer connection IMPORTANT
Measurement Range ducer, to prove suitability for chemicals and concen-
trations concerned.
Transducer Range
Pa Description of Function
VFP 100 100 The differential pressure is measured on the static princi-
VFP 300 300 ple. The differential pressure causes a membrane in the
VFP 600 600 pressure transducer to deflect, the movement is detected
and converted into a linear pressure-voltage signal.
The transducer pressure range is selected and factory-
set to the measurement range required such that the
differential pressure can be adjusted up or down by the
customer.
pnom
(100%)
0
0 Actual value signal*
* Actual value signal of the VFP not identical

with the U5 output signal of the regulator VRP
Made-Up Plug Connector Nomenclature

1 Supply voltage
2 Ground
3 Actual value signal (0 to 10 VDC)
2
Belimo VFP
Zero Point Adjustment Gravity-Dependency, Zero Point Adjustment

plane. Other installation positions must be specified on
order.If necessary, using the zero point potentiometer, the
transducer can be customer-set to another mounting
position. The supply voltage must be connected to the
VFP for at least an hour before carrying out measure-
ments. It is necessary to readjust the zero point if with
diconnected tubes:
Measurement range potentiometer One of the VRP offset indicating lights is on
(do not adjust!)
The U5 signal is measured at between > 2.5 VDC and
Zero point potentiometer > 1.7 (prior version without indicating lights).
Proceed as follows:
open housing cover
Measurement Points for Static Pressure
remove measurement tube
adjust zero point potentiometer until the actual value
output signal U5 (on regulator VRP) is 2 VDC +/-0.1 V
replace tube connection
close housing cover
The centre line of the pressure measurement point
must intersect the pipe axis at right angles.1)
The drilling diameter (d) should be as small as possible
but sufficiently large to minimize risks of blocking and
insufficient dynamics.1)
Minimum distance 2 D must be maintained in the
neutral wire before and after the air control damper.
Pressure measurement point
Requirements for Measurement Point

Minimum distance 2 D must be maintained in the
neutral wire behind elbows and bends.
Room pressure assessment points must not be

arranged in areas influenced by room flows.
Room
1) DIN 1952
3
Belimo Actuators
1
AF24-V
SM24-V
Subject
NM24-V
GM24-V
Contents
3
3
2
2
Page
Belimo Actuators
NM 24-V Actuator NM 24-V
Application
Maintenance free damper actuator for VAV terminal units
with Belimo volume flow controllers.
Function
The actuator is factory mounted and fixed to the damper
shaft. The integral rotation angle limiter is set. The
actuator is overload protected. When the end stops are
reached, the actuator stops automatically; limit switches
are not required.
The direction of rotation can be set via a switch (factory
set). For manual adjustment, the gears can be disen-
gaged via a button.
Shaft clamp Gear release button

Direction of Connection cable
rotation switch Rotation angle limiter
AF 24-V Spring Return Actuator AF 24-V
Application
5
Maintenance-free damper actuator for VAV terminal units
with Belimo volume flow controllers for applications
1 where, for safety reasons, either an open or closed
damper position must be guaranteed in the event of a
power failure (order to state fail position).
2 Function
The open or closed damper position is factory set when
mounting the actuator. If the voltage fails or is inter-
3 rupted, the return spring moves the damper to the fail
position. The rotation angle limiter is fitted and set.
The actuator is overload-protected. When the end stops
are reached, the actuator stops automatically; limit
switches are not necessary.
4 The direction of rotation can be set via a switch (factory
set). For manual adjustment the actuator can be turned
by crank to any position and fixed.
1 Shaft clamp 4 Connection cable
2 Hexagon socket for 5 Rotation angle limiter
manual damper driving
3 Direction of rotation
switch
2
Belimo Actuators
SM 24-V Actuator SM 24-V
Application
1 Maintenance free damper actuator for VAV terminal units
with higher torques and Belimo volume flow controllers.
Function
shaft. The integral rotation angle limiter is set. The ac-
3 tuator is overload protected. When the end stops are
2 reached, the actuator stops automatically; limit switches
are not required.
4 gaged via a button.
1 Shaft clamp
2 Direction of rotation switch
3 Gear release button
4 Connection cable
GM 24-V Actuator GM 24-V
Application
1 Maintenance free damper actuator for VAV terminal units
with highest torques and Belimo volume flow controllers.
Function
shaft. The integral rotation angle limiter is set. The ac-
3 tuator is overload protected. when the end stops are
2 reached, the actuator stops automatically; limit switches
are not required.
4 gaged via a button.
1 Shaft clamp
2 Direction of rotation switch
4 Connection cable
3
Belimo VAV-Compact NMV-D2
Contents
Subject Page
Volume Flow Control Tolerances 4
Volume Flow Ranges Single-duct Units 5
Order Code, Examples, Single-duct Units 6
Dual-duct Unit TVM 7
Wiring Connections 8
Variable Volume Flow Operating Mode 9
Constant Volume flow Control 10
Slave Control 11
Design changes reserved All rights reserved Gebrder Trox GmbH (12/2001) Leaflet No. E016MB9
1
VAV-Compact, NMV-D2 Area of Application

The VAV Compact NMV-D2 from Belimo is a complete
control unit designed for VAV volume flow control units.
The dynamic differential pressure transducer, damper
actuator and electronic controls are combined in one
housing. There are two operating modes available for the
control function. For variable volume flow control, a suit-
able room temperature controller (alternatively, an air
quality controller or similar) or a DDC outstation must be
used. The control signal provides the volume set point.
Switches or relays are used for constant volume flow
control with up to 3 set values.
The actual value of the volume flow is output as a stand-
ard linear, electrical signal. The voltage range for the
actual and set values is standardised at 0 to 10 VDC.
Using the ZEV setting unit, the customer can change to
2 to 10 VDC.
NMV-D2
The volume flow is microprocessor-controlled on a digi-
Tube connection for transducer tal basis. The VAV Compact has no potentiometer or
Gear release button switches, because all the parameters, including Vmin and
Connection cable Vmax, are stored in memory. Trox supplies the controller
with all the parameters set. The volume flow can be
changed by the customer easily and reliably using an
adjuster (Belimo ZEV) and certain parameters can be
read.
Several controllers can be connected to a common room
temperature controller for parallel operation. Supply/
extract air slave circuits can be provided.
Standard filtration in air-conditioning systems allows the
use of the NMV-D2 in the supply air without dust protec-
tion filters. Since a small volume flow is passed through
the transmitter in order to monitor the volume flow, the
following must be noted:
With heavy dust in the room, suitable extract air
filters must be provided.
If the air is contaminated with fluff or sticky par-
ticles or contains aggressive media, the NMV-D2
should not be used.
Variable Volume Flow Operating Mode Variable Volume Flow Operating Mode
The VAV Compact acts as a volume flow controller. The
Room temperature controller,
DDC-outstation etc.
external room temperature controller determines the con-
trol signal used for volume set point. The actual value of
Set- Actual the volume flow can be monitored as an option. The
Volume flow Volume flow room temperature controller must have at least one ana-
logue output.
NMV-D2
Constant Volume Flow Operating Mode Constant Volume Flow Operating Mode
By means of simple switches, the VAV Compact can be
Volume flow Slave controller,
monitoring, etc.
set at the programmed set values or the OPEN or
control setting
CLOSED damper position. Relay circuits or a controller
Set- Actual (DDC outstation) enable a changeover to be made. The
Volume flow Volume flow controller must have corresponding outputs which switch
accordingly. The actual value of the volume flow can be
monitored.
NMV-D2
2
Characteristic of the Actual Value Signal Description of Function

The volume flow is measured on the dynamic differential
nom pressure principle. The effective pressure (pw) of the dif-
(100 %)
ferential pressure sensor in the volume flow terminal unit
Adjustment range
enables a partial volume flow passing through the trans-
Volume flow
mitter to be detected and measured. Two temperature-

dependent resistors are used to measure this partial
volume flow, which is proportional to the total volume
flow, linearised, and temperature compensated. The
volume flow is calculated by the controller's micropro-
min unit cessor. The characteristic of the effective pressure is cali-
brated in the controller, so that linearisation can be exe-
Actual value signal U5 cuted by the microprocessor. The actual volume flow can
be monitored as the voltage signal U5 The measuring
range is set to suit each unit size during factory calibra-
tion, so that the maximum rated volume flow (Vnom) is
A 0 to 10 VDC (standard) B 2 to 10 VDC always 10 VDC.
U U -2 The required volume flow is set by the room temperature
10 8 controller or by switch contacts. The controller deter-
mines the set volume flow in accordance with the char-
acteristic shown opposite and compares this with the
actual value. The damper actuator is controlled accord-
ing to the deviation. The volume flow values Vmin and
Vmax which are parameters are factory set can be altered
by the customer using an adjuster (Belimo ZEV).
Characteristic of Volume Flow Variable Variable Volume Flow Operating Mode

The VAV Compact controls the set volume flow, between
nom Vmin and Vmax, from the control signal according to the
characteristic shown opposite. Override shut off is possi-
ble.
Volume flow
Constant Volume Flow Operating Mode

By wiring the control signal input terminal via switch con-
. tacts, constant volume flows Vmin and Vmax, and override
Vmin unit control can be achieved.
Control signal U3 Control Signal Range Limiting

For settings between Vmin = 0 % and Vmax = 100 %, the
control signal must be limited in the DDC outstation. In
A 0 to 10 VDC (standard) B 2 to 10 VDC this case, the full published volume range can be used
for future adjustment via the BMS. If the design volume
U3 U3 - 2
Vset = (Vmax - Vmin) + Vmin Vset = (Vmax - Vmin) + Vmin flow rates are set in the unit, a full voltage signal range of
10 8 0-10 VDC or 2-10 VDC can be used. However, these set-
tings can only be changed by using the Belimo ZEV
which involve gaining access to the terminal box.
3
Pressure Independent Control Characteristic Volume Flow Control Tolerances

The volume flow controller works independently of the
duct pressure, which means that pressure fluctuations do
not cause permanent volume flow changes. To prevent
the volume flow control from becoming unstable, a dead

zone is provided within which the damper is not moved.
This dead zone, coupled with the measuring tolerances,
produces a volume flow deviation AV shown opposite.
If the conditions shown in the sales brochure (e.g. mini-
mum pressure differential, inlet flow conditions, etc.) are
Volume flow % of nom
Vmax Formula Vmax Setting

The Vmax value corresponds to the volume flow which is
Vmax set with a 10 VDC control signal or Vmax overridecontrol.
Vmax set value = . 100 % The setting range for adjustment using the ZEV unit is
V nom
from 30 to max 100 %. The percentage figures relate to
Vnom.
Vmin Formula Vmin Setting

The Vmin value corresponds to the volume flow which
Vmin Vmin override control. Vmin may be set between 0 and
Vmin set value = . 100 % 100 %1) of Vmax, using the ZEV. The percentage figures
V
max relate to theVmax volume flow setting.
If Vmin is set at 0 %, the damper will be moved to the
CLOSED position with a control signal of 0 VDC (alter-
natively 2 VDC) (leakage depends on the type of unit).
ZEV Adjuster Volume Flow Adjustment on Site

The volume flow set values and the voltage ranges can
be adjusted on site with the aid of the adjuster ZEV. To
achieve this, the ZEV is connected to the controller or
remote position via a cable.
The calculated Vmin and Vmax values are set on the corre-
sponding potentiometers. These settings are input to the
controller when the set buttons are pressed.
1) Possible from approx. Jan. 1997, previously 80 %
Operating mode selector Status display (LED)

knob Set-button
Vmin adjustment knob Control circuit state
Vmax adjustment knob
Reset (Trox values)
4

l/s m3/h
Vmin Vmax Vmin Vmax
Size
pub.
to from Vnom pub.
to from Vnom
100 2) 10 75 30 95 36 270 108 342
125 15 120 45 150 54 432 162 540
160 25 200 75 250 90 720 270 900
200 40 325 120 405 144 1170 432 1458
250 60 490 185 615 216 1764 666 2214
315 105 820 310 1025 378 2952 1116 3690
400 170 1345 505 1680 612 4842 1818 6048

l/s m3/h
mm
Vmin-pub.1) to from to Vnom Vmin-pub.1) to from to Vnom
200 x 100 45 170 65 215 162 612 234 774
300 x 100 65 255 95 320 234 918 342 1152
400 x 100 85 340 130 425 306 1224 468 1530
500 x 100 105 430 160 535 378 1548 576 1926
600 x 100 130 520 195 650 468 1872 702 2340
200 x 200 85 330 125 415 306 1188 450 1494
300 x 200 125 495 185 620 450 1782 666 2232
400 x 200 165 660 250 825 594 2376 900 2970
500 x 200 205 830 310 1035 738 2988 1116 3726
600 x 200 250 1000 375 1250 900 3600 1350 4500
700 x 200 290 1160 435 1450 1044 4176 1566 5220
800 x 200 330 1320 495 1650 1188 4752 1782 5940
300 x 300 185 735 275 920 666 2646 990 3312
400 x 300 245 985 370 1230 882 3546 1332 4428
500 x 300 305 1230 460 1535 1098 4428 1656 5526
600 x 300 370 1480 555 1850 1332 5328 1998 6660
700 x 300 430 1720 645 2150 1548 6192 2322 7740
800 x 300 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820
900 x 300 555 2215 830 2770 1998 7974 2988 9972
1000 x 300 620 2480 930 3100 2232 8928 3348 11160
400 x 400 325 1305 490 1630 1170 4698 1764 5868
500 x 400 410 1630 610 2040 1476 5868 2196 7344
600 x 400 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820
700 x 400 570 2280 855 2850 2052 8208 3078 10260
800 x 400 650 2600 975 3250 2340 9360 3510 11700
900 x 400 735 2935 1100 3670 2646 10566 3960 13212
1000 x 400 820 3280 1230 4100 2952 11808 4428 14760
500 x 500 510 2030 760 2540 1836 7308 2736 9144
600 x 500 610 2440 915 3050 2196 8784 3294 10980
700 x 500 710 2840 1065 3550 2556 10224 3834 12780
800 x 500 810 3240 1215 4050 2916 11664 4374 14580
900 x 500 915 3655 1370 4570 3294 13158 4932 16452
1000 x 500 1020 4080 1530 5100 3672 14688 5508 18360
600 x 600 730 2920 1095 3650 2628 10512 3942 13140
700 x 600 850 3400 1275 4250 3060 12240 4590 15300
800 x 600 970 3880 1455 4850 3492 13968 5238 17460
900 x 600 1100 4400 1650 5500 3960 15840 5940 19800
1000 x 600 1220 4880 1830 6100 4392 17568 6588 21960
700 x 700 990 3960 1485 4950 3564 14256 5346 17820
800 x 700 1140 4560 1710 5700 4104 16416 6156 20520
900 x 700 1280 5120 1920 6400 4608 18432 6912 23040
1000 x 700 1420 5680 2130 7100 5112 20448 7668 25560
800 x 800 1300 5200 1950 6500 4680 18720 7020 23400
900 x 800 1460 5840 2190 7300 5256 21024 7884 26280
1000 x 800 1620 6480 2430 8100 5832 23328 8748 29160
900 x 900 1640 6560 2460 8200 5904 23616 8856 29520
1000 x 900 1820 7280 2730 9100 6552 26208 9828 32760
1000 x 1000 2020 8080 3030 10100 7272 29088 10908 36360
1) Vmin = 0 is also possible 2) Only TVR Grey colored sizes not deliverable with NMV-D2 (torques too high)!
5
Volume Flow Control Tolerances 1) Single-Duct Units

Volume flow V in %
80 5 5
60 7 7
40 7 8 Vmin Vmax
20 9 14
10 20 >14 / BC5 /
TVZ-R / 160 / 00 E0 - 50 - 240 l/s
<10 >20 >14

TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / BC5 / M0 - 50 - 240 l/s
TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / BC5 / S0 - 50 - 240 l/s
TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / BC5 / F2 - 100 l/s

E Individual
S Slave (standard range) 2)
U Changeover 2 = Voltage range 2 to 10 VDC
F Constant

Operating
Mode Factory Setting
E0; E2
Vmin set at required Vmin
M2; M0 Vmax set at required Vmax
S0; S2
Vmin set at 0 %
Vmax set at volume flow ratio to master
controller
U2 3)
Vmin set at required volume flow 1
(lower value)
Vmax set at required volume flow 2
(higher value)
F2 3)
Vmin set at required volume flow
Vmax set at 100 %.
2) Operating modes U and F only 2 to 10 VDC
3) It is possible to use a fixed value controller as master
6
Volume Flow Ranges TVM Dual-Duct Unit TVM

l/s m3/h
Size Vmin- Vmin- Order Code / Examples
Vnom Vnom
unit unit
125 45 150 162 540
160 75 250 270 900
200 120 405 432 1458
250 185 615 666 2214 Vwarm Vcold
TVM-R / 160 / BFC / M0 - 75 - 240 l/s
Vwarm = Vcold
TVM-R / 160 / BFC / F2 - 200 l/s
Volume Flow Tolerances TVM 1)

Volume flow V in % Operating Mode Voltage Range
as % of Vnom TVMcold TVM total E Individual 0 = Voltage range 0 to 10 VDC
80 5 10 F Constant 2 = Voltage range 2 to 10 VDC
60 5 12
40 7 15
20 9 -
10 20 -
<10 >20 -


Mode
Cold duct controller Warm duct controller
E0
E2
Vmin set at 0 % Vmin set at required
M0
Vmax set at required Volume flow Vwarm
M2 Volume flow (Vcold) Vmax set at 100 %
F0
F2
7
Wiring Connections Nomenclature

, - Ground, neutral
z Input operating control
U/pp Actual volume flow U5
Wiring
The 24 VAC/VDC voltage supply must be wired up by the
IMPORTANT customer. Safety transformers must be used (EN 60742).
The examples illustrated show the most common If several volume flow controllers are connected to one
arrangements for volume flow control. The Belimo 24 V network, it is important to ensure that a common
specifications must be observed in the overall neutral or ground wire is used and that this is not con-
control system design, selection of the other control nected to other wires.
components and wire sizing.
Service Signal Commissioning Connections

It is advisable that the signal line for connecting the
Room adjuster ZEV is linked up in an easily accessible location.
temperature This means that ceiling panels do not need be removed in
controller
order to take measurements. Suitable locations include:
Spare terminals in room temperature controller or wall
Suitable mounted enclosure.
enclosure,
terminal block
the commissioning connection.
IMPORTANT
The commissioning connection will also work if the
U5 signal is used for slave controls or monitoring.
However, the U5 signal differs from the actual value
when the ZEV unit is connected.
8
Variable Volume Flow Operating Mode Variable Volume Flow Control

with Override Control CLOSED The VAV Compact is connected to the 24 VAC mains. If
the DDC outstation/controller is on the same mains net-
Supply Voltage 24 VAC, work, the control signal can be applied through a single
Input Voltage 0 to 10 or 2 to 10 VDC wire. If the mains networks are separate, the control
signal is connected by two wires. The actual value signal
RT Controller
for the volume flow can be used.
24 VAC It is possible to connect several VAV Compacts in paral-
lel.
Several volume flow controllers (supply or extract air) are
run in parallel by one DDC outstation/controller. If the
1) volume flow terminal units are of the same size and the
1 Vmin and Vmax values are programmed the same, all units
1
Override control the same volume flow. If there are different set-
Control tings, the units conduct equal percentages. In this way, a
1 2 3 5 CLOSED ratio control between the supply and extract air control-
NMV-D2 lers can be achieved.
Operating Mode E0, E2, M0, M2 A volt free switch contact provided by the customer ena-
bles the variable volume flow control to be overridden
and a CLOSED override control achieved. The control
wire to the room temperature controller should be inter-
Parallel rupted.
connection
1 2 3 5 of other
NMV-D2 controllers
Operating Mode E0, E2, M0, M2
Input voltage 2 to 10 VDC
24 VAC RT Controller
(24 VDC)
1
1
Override
Control
1 2 3 5 CLOSED
NMV-D2
Operating Mode E2, M2
Parallel
connection
1 2 3 5 of other
NMV-D2 controllers
1) e.g. Diode 1N 4007
9
Constant Volume Flow Control Changeover Mode

By means of simple switching between the supply volt-
Supply Voltage 24 VAC age connections and the control input z, override con-
Input Voltage 2 to 10 VDC trols at various volume flow set values or Open/Closed
damper positions are possible in constant volume flow
operating mode. If several functions are combined, the
24 VAC contacts must be linked in relation to one another, to pre-
vent a short circuit.
Several volume flow controllers can also be operated by
S1 one switch, if there is a common ground wire and the
S2 control signal is connected in parallel.
S3 1)
S4
All Switches
Parallel OPEN V min
connection of S1 closed CLOSED
1 2 3 5 other controllers
possible S2 closed V max
NMV-D2
S3 closed VZS
Operating Mode U2
S4 closed CLOSED
Supply Voltage 24 VAC

Input Voltage 0 to 10 VDC
Override Controls
24 VAC
Designation Control
CLOSED Damper Closed
S2
min Constant Volume Flow min
S3 max Constant Volume Flow max

1)
Constant Volume Flow
S4 Intermediate setting
ZS
V ZS = (V max - V min) . 0.5+V min
Parallel
connection of
possible
NMV-D2
Operating Mode E0
Override Control Damper OPEN possible
1) e.g. Diode 1N 4007
if required
Constant Volume Flow with DC-Supply Voltage is
not recommended
10
Slave Control Supply / Extract Air Slave Control

If the units are controlled in parallel, there may be an
24 VAC RT-Controller incorrect difference in volume between the supply and
(24 VDC) extract air flows, if the pressure in one duct region is too
low. It is therefore more beneficial to use the actual
volume flow value, usually that of the supply air flow, as
the control signal for the slave volume flow controller. If
the extract air flow is not to be controlled by the DDC
controller, a slave control is also used.
A ratio control can be achieved using the VAV Compact,
i.e. extract and supply air flows are in the same ratio to
one another under all operating conditions.
Master Controller NMV-D2
Operating Mode M
Vmax Supply Vmax Extract
=
Vmin Supply Vmin Extract
Slave Controller NMV-D2 The volume flow ratio is set on the slave controller as
Operating Mode S follows:
Vmax Extract Vnom Supply

Vmax Supply Vnom Extract
Dual Duct Terminal Unit TVM
If the volume flows are the same, the setting will be
24 VAC RT-Controller 100 %. The setting range is up to max. 100 % (up to
(24 VDC) 120 % via factory software).
Volume Flow Control of TVM Units

Two VAV Compacts are necessary in order to control a
dual duct terminal box type TVM.
The room temperature controller controls the cold duct
Cold Controller NMV-D2 volume flow controller. In most cases, the proportion of
warm air is increased in the heating cycle from 0 to the
required Vmin. The warm duct controller (Vtotal is meas-
ured) is therefore set as a constant volume controller and
To possible does not require a control signal.
slave controller
Warm Controller NMV-D2

Operating Mode E, M, F
11

The functional check prior to commissioning cannot be
carried out without the signal controller (DDC). The DDC
Check wiring controller is used to set a particular volume flow.
Connect supply voltage The actual volume flow is calculated from the monitored
Connect air supply systems actual value signal and compared with the set value.
In many cases, incorrect wiring can be the reason for
malfunction. Therefore a close examination of all connec-
tions should be made. Connections to wires 3 to 5
should be disconnected before the following checks are
Input control voltage for Vmin made:
Record the actual value signal U5 If the actuator drive is disengaged and the damper
Input control voltage for Vmax opened manually, the voltage U5 must increase. The
Record the actual value signal U5 volume flow control is checked by setting a control volt-
age on wire 3 to which the monitored value must corre-
spond after a short time, within 0.1V.
Actuate the operating control and test the desired func-
Fault Finding Check tions.
The functional check can be simplified using the adjuster
ZEV. The set volume values Vmin and Vmax can be read.
no
Supply voltage within Belimo Check trans-

specifications?
Furthermore, the ZEV indicates whether the monitored
former, etc.
value agrees with the set value.
yes
no
Actual value signal U5

Controller faulty
consistent?
yes
no
Actuator opens and Damper

closes? obstructed?
yes
no

sufficient?
Measuring tubes to
the transducer
yes damaged?
no
Packing materials
Volume flow Vmax?
removed?
yes
no
Check room tem-

Set volume flow signal?
perature controller
yes
no
Check window
Override controls?
switch, relays, etc.
Sample Order Replacement Controller Replacement Controller

As a general rule, controllers intended for replacement
must be calibrated for the terminal box type and size of
Belimo NMV-D2,
unit. When ordering the replacement controller, Vmin and
preset for TVR / 125 / E0 - 140 - 300 m3/h
Vmax must be indicated. Controllers which have not been
voltage range 0 to 10 VDC, replacement for NMV24-D/NMV-D2 set can only be accepted as a temporary solution.
12
Belimo VAV-Compact NMV-D2M
Contents
Subject Page
Areas of Application 2
Volume Flow Ranges Single-duct Units 5
Order Code, Examples, Single-duct Units 6
Dual-duct Unit TVM 7
Wiring Connections 8
Variable Volume Flow Control 9
Constant Volume flow Control 10
Slave Control 11
Design changes reserved All rights reserved Gebrder Trox GmbH (02/2002) Leaflet No. E016KM1
1
VAV-Compact, NMV-D2M The actual value of the volume flow is output as a stand-
ard linear, electrical signal. The voltage range for the
6 actual and set values is standardised at 0 to 10 VDC.
Using the ZEV setting unit, the customer can change to
7 2 to 10 VDC.
2 8 The volume flow is microprocessor-controlled on a digi-
tal basis. The VAV Compact has no potentiometer or
switches, because all the parameters, including Vmin and
4
1 Vmax, are stored in memory. Trox supplies the controller
with all the parameters set. The volume flow can be
5 changed by the customer easily and reliably using an
3
adjuster (Belimo ZEV) and certain parameters can be
read.
Several controllers can be connected to a common room
temperature controller for parallel operation. Supply/
extract air slave circuits can be provided.
1 NMV-D2M Standard filtration in air-conditioning systems allows the
2 Tube connection for transducer use of the NMV-D2 in the supply air without dust protec-
3 Gear release button tion filters. Since a small volume flow is passed through
the transmitter in order to monitor the volume flow, the
4 Connection service unit
following must be noted:
5 Connection cable With heavy dust in the room, suitable extract air
6 Shaft clamp filters must be provided.
7 Direction of rotation display If the air is contaminated with fluff or sticky par-
8 Rotation limiter ticles or contains aggressive media, the NMV-D2M
should not be used.
Variable Volume Flow Operating Mode Variable Volume Flow Operating Mode
The VAV Compact acts as a volume flow controller. The
Room temperature controller,
external room temperature controller determines the con-
DDC-outstation etc.
trol signal used for volume set point. The actual value of
Set- Actual the volume flow can be monitored as an option. The
Volume flow Volume flow room temperature controller must have at least one ana-
logue output.
NMV-D2M
Constant Volume Flow Operating Mode Constant Volume Flow Operating Mode
By means of simple switches, the VAV Compact can be
Volume flow Slave controller,
monitoring, etc. set at the programmed set values or the OPEN or
control setting
CLOSED damper position. Relay circuits or a controller
Set- Actual (DDC outstation) enable a changeover to be made. The
Volume flow Volume flow controller must have corresponding outputs which switch
accordingly. The actual value of the volume flow can be
monitored.
NMV-D2M
Area of Application
The VAV Compact NMV-D2M from Belimo is a complete PP/MP-Bus Function and Integration
control unit designed for VAV volume flow control units. in LONWORKS-Systems (on Site)
The dynamic differential pressure transducer, damper The VAV-Compact NMV-D2M incorporates the Belimo
actuator and electronic controls are combined in one MP-Bus system which allowsup to 8 VAV units to be
housing. There are two operating modes available for the linked together in a very simple way and in the following
control function. For variable volume flow control, a suit- systems:
able room temperature controller (alternatively, an air
quality controller or similar) or a DDC outstation must be LONWORKS-Systems in connection with Belimo inter-
used. The control signal provides the volume set point. face UK24LON
Switches or relays are used for constant volume flow DDC controllers with integrated MP-Bus interface
control with up to 3 set values. For more information please contact Belimo!
2

nom pressure principle. The effective pressure (pw) of the dif-
(100 %)
ferential pressure sensor in the volume flow terminal unit
Adjustment range
enables a partial volume flow passing through the trans-
Volume flow
mitter to be detected and measured. Two temperature-

dependent resistors are used to measure this partial
volume flow, which is proportional to the total volume
flow, linearised, and temperature compensated. The
volume flow is calculated by the controller's micropro-
min unit cessor. The characteristic of the effective pressure is cali-
brated in the controller, so that linearisation can be exe-
Actual value signal U5 cuted by the microprocessor. The actual volume flow can
be monitored as the voltage signal U5 The measuring
range is set to suit each unit size during factory calibra-
tion, so that the maximum rated volume flow (Vnom) is
A 0 to 10 VDC (standard) B 2 to 10 VDC always 10 VDC.
U U -2 The required volume flow is set by the room temperature
10 8 controller or by switch contacts. The controller deter-
mines the set volume flow in accordance with the char-
acteristic shown opposite and compares this with the
actual value. The damper actuator is controlled accord-
ing to the deviation. The volume flow values Vmin and
Vmax which are parameters are factory set can be altered
by the customer using an adjuster (Belimo ZEV).
Characteristic of Volume Flow Variable Variable Volume Flow Operating Mode

The VAV Compact controls the set volume flow, between
nom Vmin and Vmax, from the control signal according to the
characteristic shown opposite. Override shut off is possi-
ble.
Volume flow
Constant Volume Flow Operating Mode

By wiring the control signal input terminal via switch con-
. tacts, constant volume flows Vmin and Vmax, and override
Vmin unit control can be achieved.
Control signal U3 Control Signal Range Limiting

For settings between Vmin = 0 % and Vmax = 100 %, the
control signal must be limited in the DDC outstation. In
A 0 to 10 VDC (standard) B 2 to 10 VDC this case, the full published volume range can be used
for future adjustment via the BMS. If the design volume
U3 U3 - 2
Vset = (Vmax - Vmin) + Vmin Vset = (Vmax - Vmin) + Vmin flow rates are set in the unit, a full voltage signal range of
10 8 0-10 VDC or 2-10 VDC can be used. However, these set-
tings can only be changed by using the Belimo ZEV or
MFT-H which involve gaining access to the terminal box.
3
Pressure Independent Control Characteristic Volume Flow Control Tolerances

duct pressure, which means that pressure fluctuations do
not cause permanent volume flow changes. To prevent
the volume flow control from becoming unstable, a dead

zone is provided within which the damper is not moved.
This dead zone, coupled with the measuring tolerances,
produces a volume flow deviation AV shown opposite.
If the conditions shown in the sales brochure (e.g. mini-
mum pressure differential, inlet flow conditions, etc.) are
Volume flow % of nom
Vmax Formula Vmax Setting

The Vmax value corresponds to the volume flow which is
Vmax set with a 10 VDC control signal or Vmax overridecontrol.
Vmax set value = . 100 % The setting range for adjustment using the ZEV unit is
V nom
from 30 to max 100 %. The percentage figures relate to
Vnom.
Vmin Formula Vmin Setting

The Vmin value corresponds to the volume flow which
Vmin Vmin override control. Vmin may be set between 0 and
Vmin set value = . 100 % 100 % of Vmax, using the ZEV. The percentage figures
V
max relate to theVmax volume flow setting.
If Vmin is set at 0 %, the damper will be moved to the
CLOSED position with a control signal of 0 VDC (alter-
natively 2 VDC) (leakage depends on the type of unit).
ZEV Adjuster Volume Flow Adjustment on Site

The volume flow set values and the voltage ranges can
be adjusted on site with the aid of the adjuster ZEV. To
achieve this, the ZEV is connected to the controller or
remote position via a cable.
The calculated Vmin and Vmax values are set on the corre-
sponding potentiometers. These settings are input to the
controller when the set buttons are pressed.
IMPORTANT
The Service unit ZEV cant display the actual mode
but mode changing is possible.
Operating mode selector Status display (LED)
knob Set-button
Vmin adjustment knob Control circuit state
Service Unit MFT-H and PC Software Tool
Vmax adjustment knob The Belimo Service unit MFT-H and the PC software Tool
Reset (Trox values) offers further functions and possibilities.
For more information please contact Belimo!
4

l/s m3/h
Vmin Vmax Vmin Vmax
Size
unit
to from Vnom unit
to from Vnom
100 2) 10 75 30 95 36 270 108 342
125 15 120 45 150 54 432 162 540
160 25 200 75 250 90 720 270 900
200 40 325 120 405 144 1170 432 1458
250 60 490 185 615 216 1764 666 2214
315 105 820 310 1025 378 2952 1116 3690
400 170 1345 505 1680 612 4842 1818 6048

l/s m3/h
mm
200 x 100 45 170 65 215 162 612 234 774
300 x 100 65 255 95 320 234 918 342 1152
400 x 100 85 340 130 425 306 1224 468 1530
500 x 100 105 430 160 535 378 1548 576 1926
600 x 100 130 520 195 650 468 1872 702 2340
200 x 200 85 330 125 415 306 1188 450 1494
300 x 200 125 495 185 620 450 1782 666 2232
400 x 200 165 660 250 825 594 2376 900 2970
500 x 200 205 830 310 1035 738 2988 1116 3726
600 x 200 250 1000 375 1250 900 3600 1350 4500
700 x 200 290 1160 435 1450 1044 4176 1566 5220
800 x 200 330 1320 495 1650 1188 4752 1782 5940
300 x 300 185 735 275 920 666 2646 990 3312
400 x 300 245 985 370 1230 882 3546 1332 4428
500 x 300 305 1230 460 1535 1098 4428 1656 5526
600 x 300 370 1480 555 1850 1332 5328 1998 6660
700 x 300 430 1720 645 2150 1548 6192 2322 7740
800 x 300 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820
900 x 300 555 2215 830 2770 1998 7974 2988 9972
1000 x 300 620 2480 930 3100 2232 8928 3348 11160
400 x 400 325 1305 490 1630 1170 4698 1764 5868
500 x 400 410 1630 610 2040 1476 5868 2196 7344
600 x 400 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820
700 x 400 570 2280 855 2850 2052 8208 3078 10260
800 x 400 650 2600 975 3250 2340 9360 3510 11700
900 x 400 735 2935 1100 3670 2646 10566 3960 13212
1000 x 400 820 3280 1230 4100 2952 11808 4428 14760
500 x 500 510 2030 760 2540 1836 7308 2736 9144
600 x 500 610 2440 915 3050 2196 8784 3294 10980
700 x 500 710 2840 1065 3550 2556 10224 3834 12780
800 x 500 810 3240 1215 4050 2916 11664 4374 14580
900 x 500 915 3655 1370 4570 3294 13158 4932 16452
1000 x 500 1020 4080 1530 5100 3672 14688 5508 18360
600 x 600 730 2920 1095 3650 2628 10512 3942 13140
700 x 600 850 3400 1275 4250 3060 12240 4590 15300
800 x 600 970 3880 1455 4850 3492 13968 5238 17460
900 x 600 1100 4400 1650 5500 3960 15840 5940 19800
1000 x 600 1220 4880 1830 6100 4392 17568 6588 21960
700 x 700 990 3960 1485 4950 3564 14256 5346 17820
800 x 700 1140 4560 1710 5700 4104 16416 6156 20520
900 x 700 1280 5120 1920 6400 4608 18432 6912 23040
1000 x 700 1420 5680 2130 7100 5112 20448 7668 25560
800 x 800 1300 5200 1950 6500 4680 18720 7020 23400
900 x 800 1460 5840 2190 7300 5256 21024 7884 26280
1000 x 800 1620 6480 2430 8100 5832 23328 8748 29160
900 x 900 1640 6560 2460 8200 5904 23616 8856 29520
1000 x 900 1820 7280 2730 9100 6552 26208 9828 32760
1000 x 1000 2020 8080 3030 10100 7272 29088 10908 36360
1) Vmin = 0 is also possible 2) Only TVR Grey colored sizes not deliverable with NMV-D2M (torques too high)!
5
Volume Flow Control Tolerances 1) Single-Duct Units

Volume flow V in %
80 5 5
60 7 7
40 7 8 Vmin Vmax
20 9 14
10 20 >14 / BC0 /
TVZ-R / 160 / 00 E0 - 50 - 240 l/s
<10 >20 >14
1) Percentage figures based on Vactual TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / BC0 / M0 - 50 - 240 l/s
TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / BC0 / S0 - 50 - 240 l/s
TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / BC0 / F2 - 100 l/s

E Individual
S Slave (standard range)
U Changeover 2 = Voltage range 2 to 10 VDC
F Constant

Operating
Mode Factory Setting
E0; E2
Vmin set at required Vmin
M2; M0 Vmax set at required Vmax
S0; S2
Vmin set at 0 %
Vmax set at volume flow ratio to master
controller
U0; U2 2)
Vmin set at required volume flow 1
(lower value)
Vmax set at required volume flow 2
(higher value)
F0; F2 2)
Vmin set at required volume flow
Vmax set at 100 %
2) It is possible to use a fixed value controller as master
6
Volume Flow Ranges TVM Dual-Duct Unit TVM

l/s m3/h
Size Vmin- Vmin- Order Code / Examples
Vnom Vnom
unit unit
125 45 150 162 540
160 75 250 270 900
200 120 405 432 1458
250 185 615 666 2214 Vwarm Vcold
TVM-R / 160 / BF0 / M0 - 75 - 240 l/s
Vwarm = Vcold
TVM-R / 160 / BF0 / F2 - 200 l/s

Volume flow V in % Operating Mode Voltage Range
E Individual 0 = Voltage range 0 to 10 VDC
80 5 10 F Constant 2 = Voltage range 2 to 10 VDC
60 5 12
40 7 15
20 9 -
10 20 -
<10 >20 -


Mode
E0
E2
Vmin set at 0 % Vmin set at required
M0
Vmax set at required Volume flow Vwarm
M2 Volume flow (Vcold) Vmax set at 100 %
F0
F2
7
Wiring Connections Nomenclature

, - Ground, neutral
z Input operating control
U/MP Actual volume flow U5
NMV-D2M
Wiring
The 24 VAC/VDC voltage supply must be wired up by the
IMPORTANT customer. Safety transformers must be used (EN 60742).
The examples illustrated show the most common If several volume flow controllers are connected to one
arrangements for volume flow control. The Belimo 24 V network, it is important to ensure that a common
specifications must be observed in the overall neutral or ground wire is used and that this is not con-
control system design, selection of the other control nected to other wires.
components and wire sizing.
Service Signal Commissioning Connections

Room adjuster ZEV is linked up in an easily accessible location.
temperature This means that ceiling panels do not need be removed in
controller
order to take measurements. Suitable locations include:
Spare terminals in room temperature controller or wall
Suitable mounted enclosure.
enclosure,
terminal block
the commissioning connection.
IMPORTANT
NMV-D2M The commissioning connection will also work if the
U5 signal is used for slave controls or monitoring.
However, the U5 signal differs from the actual value
when the ZEV unit is connected.
NOTE
When using MP bus system the NMV-D2M gets the input
signal from DDC or BMS on the MP-connection (U/MP).
An indication of actual volume flow rate with the U5
signal isnt possible in this configuration. The actual
volume flow rate is assigned by the communication into
the DDC/BMS.
When using MP bus the control units MFT-H or PC-Tool

has to be connected central to the UK24LON and not to
the NMV-D2M directly.
8
Variable Volume Flow Operating Mode Variable Volume Flow Control

with Override Control CLOSED The VAV Compact is connected to the 24 VAC mains. If
the DDC outstation/controller is on the same mains net-
Supply Voltage 24 VAC, work, the control signal can be applied through a single
Input Voltage 0 to 10 or 2 to 10 VDC wire. If the mains networks are separate, the control
signal is connected by two wires. The actual value signal
RT Controller
for the volume flow can be used.
24 VAC It is possible to connect several VAV Compacts in paral-
lel.
Several volume flow controllers (supply or extract air) are
run in parallel by one DDC outstation/controller. If the
1) volume flow terminal units are of the same size and the
1 Vmin and Vmax values are programmed the same, all units
1
Override control the same volume flow. If there are different set-
Control tings, the units conduct equal percentages. In this way, a
1 2 3 5 CLOSED ratio control between the supply and extract air control-
NMV-D2M lers can be achieved.
Operating Mode E0, E2, M0, M2 A volt free switch contact provided by the customer ena-
bles the variable volume flow control to be overridden
and a CLOSED override control achieved. The control
wire to the room temperature controller should be inter-
Parallel rupted.
connection
1 2 3 5 of other
NMV-D2M controllers
Operating Mode E0, E2, M0, M2
Input Voltage 2 to 10 VDC
24 VAC RT Controller
(24 VDC)
1
1
Override
Control
1 2 3 5 CLOSED
NMV-D2M
Parallel
connection
1 2 3 5 of other
NMV-D2M controllers
1) e.g. Diode 1N 4007
9
Constant Volume Flow Control Changeover Mode

By means of simple switching between the supply volt-
Supply Voltage 24 VAC age connections and the control input z, override con-
Input Voltage 2 to 10 VDC trols at various volume flow set values or Open/Closed
damper positions are possible in constant volume flow
operating mode. If several functions are combined, the
24 VAC contacts must be linked in relation to one another, to pre-
vent a short circuit.
Several volume flow controllers can also be operated by
S1 one switch, if there is a common ground wire and the
S2 control signal is connected in parallel.
S3 1)
S4
Parallel
connection of
possible
NMV-D2M
Operating Mode U2
Supply Voltage 24 VAC Switch Switch Override Effect

Input Voltage 0 to 10 VDC position controls
. .
S1 . . . S4 open Vmin Constant Volume Flow Vmin
S1 closed CLOSED Damper closed
24 VAC . .
S2 closed Vmax Constant Volume Flow Vmax
.
. Constant Volume Flow VZS
S3 closed VZS . interim
. . position .
VZS = (Vmax Vmin) 0.5 + Vmin
S2
S4 closed CLOSED Damper closed
S3 1)
S4
Parallel
connection of
possible
NMV-D2M
Operating Mode U0
1) e.g. Diode 1N 4007

Override Control Damper OPEN possible
if required
Constant Volume Flow with DC-Supply Voltage is
not recommended
Override controls with diodes not possible with
supply voltage 24 VDC
10
Slave Control Supply / Extract Air Slave Control

If the units are controlled in parallel, there may be an
24 VAC RT-Controller incorrect difference in volume between the supply and
(24 VDC) extract air flows, if the pressure in one duct region is too
low. It is therefore more beneficial to use the actual
volume flow value, usually that of the supply air flow, as
the control signal for the slave volume flow controller. If
the extract air flow is not to be controlled by the DDC
controller, a slave control is also used.
A ratio control can be achieved using the VAV Compact,
i.e. extract and supply air flows are in the same ratio to
one another under all operating conditions.
Master Controller NMV-D2M
Operating Mode M
Vmax Supply Vmax Extract
=
Vmin Supply Vmin Extract
Slave Controller NMV-D2M The volume flow ratio is set on the slave controller as
Operating Mode S follows:
Vmax Extract Vnom Supply

Vmax Supply Vnom Extract
Dual Duct Terminal Unit TVM
24 VAC RT-Controller 100 %. The setting range is up to max. 100 % (up to
(24 VDC) 120 % via factory software).
Volume Flow Control of TVM Units

Two VAV Compacts are necessary in order to control a
dual duct terminal box type TVM.
The room temperature controller controls the cold duct
Cold Controller NMV-D2M volume flow controller. In most cases, the proportion of
warm air is increased in the heating cycle from 0 to the
required Vmin. The warm duct controller (Vtotal is meas-
ured) is therefore set as a constant volume controller and
To possible does not require a control signal.
slave controller
Warm Controller NMV-D2M

11

The functional check prior to commissioning cannot be
carried out without the signal controller (DDC). The DDC
Check wiring controller is used to set a particular volume flow.
Connect supply voltage The actual volume flow is calculated from the monitored
Connect air supply systems actual value signal and compared with the set value.
In many cases, incorrect wiring can be the reason for
malfunction. Therefore a close examination of all connec-
tions should be made. Connections to wires 3 to 5
should be disconnected before the following checks are
Input control voltage for Vmin made:
Record the actual value signal U5 If the actuator drive is disengaged and the damper
Input control voltage for Vmax opened manually, the voltage U5 must increase. The
Record the actual value signal U5 volume flow control is checked by setting a control volt-
age on wire 3 to which the monitored value must corre-
spond after a short time, within 0.1V.
Actuate the operating control and test the desired func-
Fault Finding Check tions.
The functional check can be simplified using the adjuster
ZEV or MFT-H. The set volume values Vmin and Vmax can
no
Supply voltage within Belimo Check trans-

specifications?
be read. Furthermore, the ZEV indicates whether the
former, etc.
monitored value agrees with the set value.
yes
no
Actual value signal U5

Controller faulty
consistent?
yes
no
Actuator opens and Damper

closes? obstructed?
yes
no
Volume flow Vmin?

Duct pressure
sufficient?
Measuring tubes to
yes the transducer
no
damaged?
Volume flow Vmax?
yes
no
Check room tem-

Set volume flow signal?
perature controller
yes
no
Check window
Override controls?
Sample Order Replacement Controller Replacement Controller

set for the terminal unit type and size must be used.
Belimo NMV-D2M,
preset for TVR / 125 / E0 - 45 - 100 l/s
solution. The following must be specified when ordering
voltage range 0 to 10 VDC, replacement for NMV24-D/NMV-D2M
a replacement controller:
Terminal unit type and size and in the case of TVM
units, warm duct or cold duct controller
Operating mode
Vmin and Vmax
Voltage range
Delivery date of the faulty controller
12
Belimo Adjuster ZEV
1
Subject
Contents
Operation
Areas of Application
3
2
2
Page
Design changes reserved All rights reserved Gebrder Trox GmbH (12/2001) Leaflet No. E016MM2
Belimo Adjuster ZEV
ZEV Adjuster Areas of Application

The Belimo ZEV control unit is designed for operating
and servicing the Belimo VRD2 and NVM-D2 electronic
5 volume flow controllers. On this device the customer's
8 2 volume flow control parameters are easily visible and
6 accessible (the NVM-D2 controller has no potentiometer).
9 3
7 4 In the function test a light diode (LED) indicates whether
the required volume flow has been reached. The set
1 limit values, min and max, are read on the control knobs
10 11
and can be reset if necessary. The operating mode of the
12 NMV-D2 (VAV Compact) can also be set with the ZEV.
The ZEV is connected to the controller to be tested.
13 A separate power supply is not necessary.
The control unit communicates by cable U5 with the
controller to be tested. The respective parameters are
located by the control buttons which incorporate light
diodes. New values are set and sent to the controller,
Mode - control knob Display LED min
where they are stored in non-volatile memory. The factory
Mode Display LED Set knob for set volume flow parameters min and max can be recalled
Setting knob min setting by the reset button. This function does not apply to the
for operating mode Display LED w=x/wx operating mode.
max control knob Reset knob for At times the control unit can become blocked. Pressing
Display LED max min/max setting the button will shut off the power supply so that the ZEV
can be initialized again.
Set knob for Adapter with cable
max setting Power cut-off 2)
IMPORTANT
min control knob 1)

As long as connection 5 is connected to the ZEV, the
1) Setting range 0 to 100 % from February 1997 actual value output signal U5 will not correspond to
2) As of approx. January 1998 no longer available the current value. If slave controllers or display de-
vices are connected, greater differentials between
supply air and extract air can be set and the correct
values displayed. Disconnect when in doubt.
Connection to NVM-D2 / VRD2
24 VAC NMV-D2, VRD2

1 2 5
ZEV 1 2 5
1 Earth, ground
2 Power supply 24 VAC
5 U/pp, output actual volume flow U5 and
communication signal
2
Belimo Adjuster ZEV
Condition: Parameters Located Locating the Parameters

Applies to VRD2 and NMV-D2.
Connect ZEV.
Turn min control knob slowly backwards and forwards
over the whole setting range until the appropriate LED
lights up and remains on.
The value to be read corresponds to the currently
stored value.
Repeat the procedure for max and the operating
mode.
If no setting min and max can be found and the LED
does not light up, this value may lie outside the range
(older ZEVs). The parameters can be changed and reset
(to the outside value), but not the location. If all 3 LED's
are flashing at irregular intervals a different operating
Display Volume Flow Actual Value mode has been programmed. (It is also possible to
change the parameters here).
Function Testing Volume Flow Control

Applies to VRD2 and NVM-D2.
Connect ZEV.
Green LED flashes constantly (w=x):
The current volume flow corresponds to the rated
value and the damper goes into the required override
position OPEN or SHUT. In this case the control circuit
is functioning correctly. In some circumstances the
LED lights up: Volume flow set damper is wide open and the volume flow is still too
LED flashes: Volume flow not set low. This indicates low duct pressure.
Green LED flashes (w<>x):
The set volume is not reached yet. In some circum-
stances the damper is wide open and the volume flow
is still too low. This indicates low duct pressure.
It is not possible for the LED to show the size of the
New Parameters volume flow.
Changing the Parameters

NMV-D2: All parameters.
VRD2: Only operating mode 0/2 to 10 VDC.
Connect ZEV.
Set min control button at the required percentage
value.
Press appropriate set button.
Appropriate LED lights up and indicates that the new
programme has been accepted.
Carry out the procedure for max and the operating
mode if necessary.
Factory Setting Recall The factory set values for min and max are reactivated
by the RESET button. Any changes are lost.
If the control unit becomes blocked all LEDs behave
illogically press the power off button (terminal 2) until
the green light goes out.
3
Staefa PRVU
Contents
Subject Page
Service Unit ZS 1 4
Volume Flow Ranges Single Duct Units 5
Order Code, Order Example, Single Duct Units 6
Volume Flow Ranges
Dual Duct Units TVM 7
Order Code, Order Examples TVM 7
Terminal Identification 8
Supply Air/Extract Air Slave Control 9
Supply Air/Extract Air Slave Control with TVM 9
Design changes reserved All rights reserved Gebrder Trox GmbH (12/2001) Leaflet No. E016MF3
1
Staefa PRVU
PRVU Areas of Application

2 4 The room temperature and volume flow controller Staefa
6 PRVU is designed for use in volume flow controllers in
VAV systems. The main control parameter, room tempe-
rature, is kept constant with the supply air volume flow
as auxiliary parameter.
The control circuits are digital with a microprocessor. The
1 controllers can function independently. The Pronto bus
can network the controller to a communication module or
an adapter and so provide a link to a higher level system.
3 The room temperature is measured by a room control
unit which also allows the room occupant to make any
necessary changes. The controller can function in
various operating modes (comfort, standby), which can
be set locally or via the Pronto bus. There is also a heat-
ing sequence.
4 5 All control parameters including min and max are stored
in non-volatile memory. The controllers are supplied by
PRVU controller Trox with all parameters set. The service unit enables
customers to change the volume flow easily and reliably.
LED Function control
Supply and extract air slave systems are possible with
Control value - potentiometer further PRVUs.
Connection terminals With normal filters in comfort air conditioning systems
Tube connections for transducer the controller can be used in the supply air without addi-
Service unit connection tional dust prevention measures. As a part of the volume
flow passes through the transducer to detect volume
flow, the following should be noted:
Always use the correct extract air filter when there
is a heavy accumulation of dust in the rooms.
The PRVU cannot be used if the air is polluted by
fibres, adhesive matter or aggressive media.
Characteristic Curve of Actual Value
nom
DCMD1) . pressure principle. The effective pressure (pw) of the dif-
actual = Nom
ferential pressure sensor in the volume flow control unit
Setting range
100
Volume flow
allows a partial volume flow to be sensed. This volume

flow, which is proportional to the total volume flow, is
measured, temperature compensated and linearised by a
thermal measuring process. The measurement range
(control value) is adjusted at the factory to the size of the
unit, so that 10 VDC corresponds to the unit nominal
min pub.
volume flow (nom).
0 The rated volume flow is set by the room temperature
0 Actual value command 100 % control circuit within the limits of max and min. This
volume flow is compared with the actual value. The dam-
1) Data of actual value command per actuator is controlled according to the volume flow
control deviation. The PRVU controller has a three point
actuator adjusted to the controller.
2
Staefa PRVU
Duct Pressure Independent Control Volume Flow Control

1000
Pa duct pressure, i.e. the fluctuations in pressure do not
min max cause permanent changes in volume flow.
800
To prevent the volume flow from becoming unstable a

600 neutral zone (hysteresis) must be allowed, within which

the damper blade does not move. This dead zone and
400 the measurement tolerances lead to a volume flow devia-
tion as shown in the diagram opposite.
200 If the conditions mentioned in the leaflets (e.g. lowest
pressure differential, supply air conditions) are not ob-
served, larger deviations can be expected.
20 40 60 80 100
% of nom
Volume flow
Vmax Setting
The max value corresponds to the volume flow for a
large room load. The values range from 0 to 100 %.
Values over 97 % should not be entered. The percentage
max figures relate to nom.
max parameter = . 100 %
nom
Vmin Setting
The min value corresponds to the volume flow for the
smallest room load. min can be entered between 0 and
min
min parameter = . 100 % 100 % (max. 97 %). The percentage figures relate to
nom nom.
It must be noted that, if the parameter is set at min =
0 %, the damper should not shut tight as happens in
override control. The controller closes the damper until
the actual value is 0 % equals 0 l/s. A leakage flow rate is
possible because of the dimensional tolerances.
Ratio Control
Slave Control
S nomM PRVU can provide constant differential or ratio
CMD 44 = . . 50 control.
M nomS The master controller is set at the appropriate mode
If < 0 add 100 when initialized:
Ratio control: Mode 3
Differential control: Mode 2
The slave controller is always set at Mode 0.
Constant Differential Control
S M
CMD 44 = - . 100
nomS nomM
3
Staefa PRVU
Service Unit ZS 1 Volume Flow Adjustment on Site

Customers can adjust the volume flow limit values only
with the communication interface. This can be done
locally by the ZS 1 service unit ZS 1 or centrally on the
WSE communications unit at the control terminal.
Control value setting
potentiometer
PRVU Setting Guide
The operation of the roll display service and the com-
munication unit is basically the same.
Before each write function select Command 30 and
ENTER. This loads the data for the whole group into
the service unit and control unit.
The new rated parameters are calculated to the for-
mula on page 3.
Changing the individual values does not affect the
remaining volume flows.
It is possible to parameter larger min values than max
ZS1
and vice versa. The operator must ensure that pro-
grammes do not overlap.
For single duct systems (cold air only) Commands
IMPORTANT 38 to 40 (58 to 60) are set at the same value.
The control value setting potentiometer should The parameter for slave control (constant differential or
not be adjusted. ratio) is set on the master controller.
Parameters of Volume Flow Control
Command Para-
Description
L S meter
38 58 max H Max. volume flow, heating (H)

39 59 min H Min volume flow, heating (H)
40 60 min K Min. volume flow, cooling (K)
41 61 max K Max. volume flow, cooling (K)
44 64 Factor Differential and ratio
4
Staefa PRVU
Volume Flow Ranges TVZ, TVA, TVR

l/s m3/h
Size
Vmin-1) Vmax- 2) Vnom Vmin-1) Vmax- 2) Vnom

unit unit unit unit
100 3) 15 90 95 54 324 342

125 20 145 150 72 522 540
160 35 245 250 126 882 900
200 50 395 405 180 1422 1458
250 80 595 615 288 2142 2214
315 130 995 1025 468 3582 3690
400 215 1630 1680 774 5868 6048

l/s m3/h
BxH
mm
Vmin-unit1) Vmax-unit2) Vnom Vmin-unit1) Vmax-unit2) Vnom
200 x 100 50 210 215 180 756 774

300 x 100 75 310 320 270 1116 1152
400 x 100 100 410 425 360 1476 1530
500 x 100 125 520 535 450 1872 1926
600 x 100 145 630 650 522 2268 2340
200 x 200 95 405 415 342 1458 1494
300 x 200 145 605 620 522 2178 2232
400 x 200 195 800 825 702 2880 2970
500 x 200 235 1005 1035 846 3618 3726
600 x 200 305 1215 1250 1098 4374 4500
700 x 200 330 1410 1450 1188 5076 5220
800 x 200 400 1600 1650 1440 5760 5940
300 x 300 220 895 920 792 3222 3312
400 x 300 295 1195 1230 1062 4302 4428
500 x 300 370 1490 1535 1332 5364 5526
600 x 300 475 1795 1850 1710 6462 6660
700 x 300 520 2090 2150 1872 7524 7740
800 x 300 625 2375 2450 2250 8550 8820
900 x 300 665 2690 2770 2394 9684 9972
1000 x 300 780 3010 3100 2808 10836 11160
400 x 400 410 1585 1630 1476 5706 5868
500 x 400 505 1980 2040 1818 7128 7344
600 x 400 635 2380 2450 2286 8568 8820
700 x 400 710 2770 2850 2556 9972 10260
800 x 400 845 3150 3250 3042 11340 11700
900 x 400 915 3560 3670 3294 12816 13212
1000 x 400 1035 3980 4100 3726 14328 14760
500 x 500 615 2470 2540 2214 8892 9144
600 x 500 740 2960 3050 2664 10656 10980
700 x 500 865 3450 3550 3114 12420 12780
800 x 500 990 3930 4050 3564 14148 14580
900 x 500 1110 4440 4570 3996 15984 16452
1000 x 500 1235 4950 5100 4446 17820 18360
600 x 600 910 3550 3650 3276 12780 13140
700 x 600 1060 4130 4250 3816 14868 15300
800 x 600 1210 4710 4850 4356 16956 17460
900 x 600 1360 5340 5500 4896 19224 19800
1000 x 600 1515 5920 6100 5454 21312 21960
700 x 700 1215 4810 4950 4374 17316 17820
800 x 700 1385 5530 5700 4986 19908 20520
900 x 700 1560 6210 6400 5616 22356 23040
1000 x 700 1735 6900 7100 6246 24840 25560
800 x 800 1610 6310 6500 5796 22716 23400
900 x 800 1810 7100 7300 6516 25560 26280
1000 x 800 2010 7875 8100 7236 28350 29160
900 x 900 2065 7975 8200 7434 28710 29520
1000 x 900 2300 8850 9100 8280 31860 32760
1000 x 1000 2575 9800 10100 9270 35280 36360
1) Vmin = 0 is also possible 2) Maximum 97 % of Vnom 3) Only TVR
5
Staefa PRVU
Volume Flow Control Deviations 1) Single Duct Units

Volume flow V in %
in % of Vnom TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVRK, TVS TVJ
Order Code / Order Example
100 5 5 The constructions available can be found in the current
80 5 5 price list.
60 7 7
40 7 8 min max
20 9 14
15 20 >14 TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / SL7 / M - 50 - 240 l/s
<15 >20 >14
TVA-R / 160 / 00 / SL7 / S - 50 - 240 l/s
1) Percentages relate to Vactual
TVR / 160 / 00 / SL7 / F - 200 l/s
TVJ-R / 400 x 107 / 00 / SL7 / E - 200 - 400 l/s
Operating mode
E Individual
M Master
S Slave
F Fixed

Operating
Factory setting
mode
Mode = 0
E CMD 38, 39, 40: Required min
CMD 41 : Required max
Mode = 3 (Ratio control, standard)

CMD 38, 39, 40: Required min
M CMD 41 : Required max
CMD 44 : Ratio to Slave
Mode = 0
S CMD 38, 39, 40: 0
CMD 41 : 97
Mode = 0
F
CMD 38 to 41 : const
Addressing
CMD Factory setting
Address as in order range 1 to 60.

90 Unless specified the item no. of the
order is used as the address.
If more than 60 items, continue with 1.
6
Staefa PRVU
Volume Flow Ranges TVM Dual Duct Units TVM

l/s m3/h Order Code / Order Examples
1) 2) 1) 2) The constructions available can be found in the current
Size min- max- Ref- min- max-
Vnom Vnom Ref-
unit unit Warm unit unit Warm price list.
125 45 145 150 185 162 522 540 666

160 75 245 250 305 270 882 900 1098 warm cold
200 120 395 405 425 432 1422 1458 1530
250 185 595 615 615 666 2142 2214 2214 TVM-R / 160 / SM8 / E - 120 - 200 l/s
warm = cold
TVM-R / 160 / SM8 / F - 150 l/s
Volume Flow Deviations TVM 3)

Volume flow V in %
in % of Vnom Operating mode
TVMcold TVM total
100 5 7 E Individual
80 5 10 M Master
60 5 12 F Fixed
40 7 15
30 8 17
20 9 -
15 20 - Volume Flow Parameters
<15 >20 -
Operating Factory setting
mode Cold Controller Warm Controller
Mode = 0 Mode = 0 (Master: 3)
E CMD 38, 39, 40: 0 CMD 38 to 41:
CMD 41: Required warm
M
Required cold (Master: CMD 44:
F
Ratio to Slave)
Adressing
CMD Factory setting
Address as in order range 1 to 60.

1) Maximum 97 % of nom 90 Unless specified the item no. of the
2) The value ref is only used as reference to calculate the actual order is used as the address.
volume flow and if necessary for CMD 44 for supply air and If more than 60 items, continue with 1.
extract air slave control. It is used in the formula as nom.
3) Percentages relate to actual
7
Staefa PRVU
Terminal Identification Nomenclature

1 Bus controller (pronto-Bus)
2 Bus controller (pronto-Bus)
3 Screening PBUS (optional)
4 to 9 Connection room control unit
PRVU 10 Input control signal, Master or energy barrier
12 Earth signal
14 Technical earthing
15, 16 Power supply 24 VAC
17 Control signal 1: open
18 Common for 3 point actuator
19 Control signal: close
25 Earth signal
26 Output control signal to slave
IMPORTANT
The following diagrams show the important signals Wiring
for volume flow control. The Staefa specifications The controller and actuator are factory wired together.
must be observed when incorporating them into the The power supply, room control unit and control signal to
whole control technology concept, selecting the con- the extract air controller and any override switching are
trol components and dimensioning the cable. Further wired by the customer.
switching is possible (Apply to Fa. Staefa). Safety transformers must be used (EN 60 742).
If several controllers are connected together by
0-10 VDC signals, short circuits could be caused in the
24 VAC network. It is recommended that a 24 VAC
controller be defined as live and always applied to
terminal 16.
Room Temperature and Volume Flow Control Room Temperature Control

with Override Control The PRVU includes the room temperature and volume
flow circuit. The room temperature is measured by the
24 VAC Room control unit room control unit which also enables the room occupant
to make any adjustments.
The parameters for the effect of room temperature con-
S1 trol on the volume flow circuit are customer set.
Override Control
The customer can install a dead make and break contact
to override the variable volume flow control. Several
units can be controlled by one switch if there is a com-
mon earth line and the control signals are parallel
switched. Switch S1 shuts off the damper completely.
The customer sets the parameters.
Operating mode M, E
8
Staefa PRVU
Supply Air / Extract Air Slave Control Supply Air / Extract Air Slave Control
In parallel controlled units an unwanted differential bet-
24 VAC Room ween supply air and extract air can arise if the pressure
control unit in a duct area is too low. Therefore it is preferable to use
the volume flow actual value, mostly that of the supply
air, as reference variable for the second volume flow con-
troller.
The actual value of the supply air volume flow is used as
0 to 100 VDC XV signal to steer the extract air. A constant
PRVU or percentage differential is set between the supply air
Master
and extract air. Ratio control or constant differential con-
Operating mode M trol is determined by the mode set on the master control-
ler. The controller parameters are factory set so that the
required values are achieved. The customer must ensure
10
that the allocation of supply air and extract air units
remains constant.
PRVU
Slave
Operating mode S Volume Flow Control of TVM Units
The two controllers of the dual duct mixing boxes Type
TVM (cold, warm) are wired by the customer according to
the circuit diagram opposite (also the 24 VAC tie circuit).
The room temperature sensor (room control unit) oper-
ates the cold controller.
In most cases the proportion of warm air is increased
from 0 to maximum to the required warm. The warm
controller is therefore set as fixed command controller
and requires no control signal (measured total). See
Leaflet TVM for description of function and control dia-
gram.
Supply Air / Extract Air Slave Control with Supply Air / Extract Air Slave Control with
Dual Duct Unit TVM Dual Duct Unit TVM
The actual value output signal XV of the warm controller
24 VAC Room control unit is programmed to the total volume flow total.
It can therefore be used in sequence switching as the
control signal for the slave controller (extract air control-
ler).
Cold Controller
PRVU TVM
Warm Controller
PRVU
Operating mode
M, E
Extract Air
Controller
Operating mode S
9
Staefa PRVU

A rapid function test of the volume flow control can be
Connect wiring carried out on systems with communication by rated/
Switch on power supply actual value comparison. If there is no communication
Switch on air conditioning systems facility the volume flow circuit is functioning correctly
when the actuator returns to its previous position once
the damper blade is manually adjusted.
If, for commissioning, the limit volume flows min and

max, must be proved, these must be set to the Staefa

documentation.
Function test
At every operation the theoretical actual value Command
according to Staefa documentation 14 (Data to command 14) is read and the volume flow
calculated to the formula on page 3.
In many cases faulty wiring is the cause of malfunction.
Therefore all customer wiring should be disconnected
before the volume flow controllers are thoroughly
Trouble Shooting checked.
If the motor drive is overridden and the damper opened
manually, the voltage at terminal 26 must first rise in rela-
no
Power supply conforms Check Transformer

tion to 25 (XV). The damper is closed again by motor con-
to Staefa regulations? etc.
trol.
yes

no
Actual value output Faulty transformer or

signal constent? controller?
yes

no
Actuator opens and Motor rotation correct?

closes? Damper blocked?
yes

Duct pressure
no
Volume flow min ?

sufficient?
Tubing to transducer
yes

damaged?
no
Volume flow max ? Protective covering

removed?
yes

no
Room temperature Check room

Control? temperature sensor
yes

Check window switch,

no
Override control?
etc.
Order Example Replacement Controller Replacement Controller

Faulty controllers must be replaced with controllers para-
metered to the volume flow controller type and size.
Staefa PRVU, Name plate data must be supplied when ordering replace-
set for TVR / 125 / M - 140 - 300 m3/h ment controllers.
10
Staefa Actuator AS1D8
1
AS1D8
Subject
Contents
2
Page
Design changes reserved All rights reserved Gebrder Trox GmbH (12/2001) Leaflet No. E016MF2
Staefa Actuator AS1D8
AS1D8 Actuator AS1D8
Application
Maintenance free air damper actuator for volume control
systems with Staefa volume flow controllers.
Function
The actuator is factory mounted on the damper shaft and
wired. The integrated stroke angle limiter is adjusted.
The drive is overload-protected. When the end stops are
reached the motor stops automatically.
The direction of the rotation is set by a switch (factory
set). For manual adjustment of the damper the drive can
be disconnected by a button.
Shaft clamp Gear release button

Direction of rotation Connecting cable
switch Rotation angle limiter
2
Siemens Compact Volume Flow Controller
VAV Static GLB181.1E/3
Contents
Subject Page
Applications 2
Functions 3
Characteristic curves 3
Functions 3
Pressure-independent control characteristics 4
Volume flow control and adjustment 4
Adjuster AST10 4
Volume-flow range for single duct units 5
Order codes for single duct units 6
Volume flow ranges for dual duct units,
Order codes 7
Terminal connections, DIL switch settings 8
Continuous controlling, Override control 9
Examples of application 10
Commissioning 11
Design changes reserved All rights reserved Gebrder Trox GmbH (12/2001) Leaflet No. E016MS0
1
Compact Controller GLB181.1E/3 Applications

The Siemens electronic volume flow controller
GLB181.1E/3 is a control unit for VAV volume control
2 units in VVS systems. The membrane pressure trans-
ducer and control electronics are integrated into one
housing. For variable volume flow control, a suitable
1 room termperature controller (or air quality controller),
a DDC outstation or a similar device must be used.
A 0 to 10 VDC signal or three-point signal (TEC controller,
3 DESIGO RXC31.1 etc.) can be used as the voltage range.
To do this, volume flow control is deactivated. Switches
or relays with a maximum of 2 set points are used for
constant volume flow control.
The GLB181.1E/3 . is not .outfitted with adjustment knobs
7 4
for performing Vmin and Vmax settings. All controller para-
meters are factory-set by Trox. The customer does not
need to make any adjustments. As soon as the supply
voltage and room temperature controller have been con-
nected, the terminal unit is ready for use.
6
Any volume flow changes that may be necessary can
easily be carrried out by the customer with the AST10
adjustment device. For parallel operation, several con-
5 trollers can be connected up to one room temperature
controller. Supply/extract air slave control can be
realized.
1 Shaft clamp
2 Rotation angle limiter Static Measuring Principle
3 Position display The actual value of the volume flow is monitored as a
4 Gear release button standard, linear electrical signal and can be switched to
5 Connecting cable a DDC or used for the display. The voltage range for
the actual and command value is standardized at 0 to
6 Transducer tubing connector
10 VDC. Volume flow is measured with a membrane
7 DIL switch (series A) pressure transducer. In automatic, recovered zero point
Socket for AST10 connecting cable (series B) calibration via an integrated air valve, minimum flow
briefly occurs in the measuring line. This flow level is so
low that as a rule the measuring element is not soiled.
However, if the unit is used in unclean air, a plastic or
coated VAV should be used.
IMPORTANT
Make certain that in critical situations the VAV
terminal unit and membrane pressure transducer
are tested for the resistance of their materials to
hazardous materials and particle concentrations in
ambient air.
Operating Modes
The GLB181.1E/3 has two operating modes, CON and
3P (see circuit diagram below).
Operating Mode CON Operating Mode 3P
Operator terminal with

Room temperature controller
communication capability, DDC
Actual volume flow 3-point signal 24 VAC

Required volume flow, 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 10 VDC GLB181.1E/3
Root extraction
GLB181.1E/3 of transmitter Actuator
signal
2
Characteristic Curve of the Actual Value Signal Functions
The volume flow is measured with a membrane pressure

Vnom transducer. The effective pressure of the differential pres-
sure sensor in the terminal unit allows the detectionThe
effective pressure pw of the differential pressure sensor
Volume flow
in the VAV terminal unit is measured in the membrane

pressure transmitter of the GLB181.1E/3 and linearized.
The volume flow is calculated by a microprocessor in the
controller.
The actual volume flow is available as a linear voltage
signal U. The measurement range (reference value) is set
Vmin unit during factory calibration to suit the unit size in such a
way that 10 VDC always
. corresponds to the unit nominal
0 Actual value signal UC 10 VDC volume flow rate (Vnom).
The required volume flow is set by the room temperature
controller or by switches. The controller determines the
required volume flow in accordance with the characteris-
tic curve shown in the illustration and compares this
with the actual value. The external damper actuator is
Characteristic Curve of the Command Variable controlled according.to the deviation.
. The factory-set
volume flow ranges Vmin and Vmax can be altered by the
customer using a Siemens AST10 adjuster, which can
Vnom also be used to change the operating mode.
V max
Vreq. = Y (Vmax Vmin) + Vmin IMPORTANT
Volume flow
10
The operating mode must be set for each system
because otherwise the desired function will not be
available!
Vmin
Operating Mode CON
Vmin unit
Variable Volume Flow
Using the command variables shown in the illustration
0 Command signal Y 10 VDC
as a basis, the GLB181.1E/3
. calculates
. the volume flow,
which can range from Vmin to Vmax. Override controls
CLOSED or OPEN can be realized.
Constant Volume Flow
To realize
. override
. control as well as constant volume
flows Vmin and Vmax, wire the input terminals for the com-
mand signal via relays or contacts.
Command Signal Range Limiting
In the DDC outstation, the. command signal . must be lim-
ited for settings between Vmin = 0 % and Vmax = 100 %. In
this situation, the full published volume range can be
used for parameterizing. If the desired volume flow rates
are set in the unit, a standard voltage signal range of
0-10 VDC can be used to control all units. However,
these settings can only be changed individually by using
the AST10, which involves gaining access to the terminal
unit.
(Operating Mode 3P)

In this operating mode, the internal controller electronics
are inactivated. Only. the reference
. value is factory set.
Any parameterized Vmin or Vmax values have no impact on
function.
3
Duct Pressure-independent Volume Flow Control

Control Characteristics The volume flow controller works independently of duct
pressure, which means that pressure fluctuations result
1000
Pa in only transient changes in volume flow.
800 To prevent destabilization of volume flow control, a dead
zone is provided within which the damper does not
600 move. This dead zone, in conjunction with measuring .

tolerances, produces the volume flow deviation V
400 illustrated here.
If the conditions mentioned in the unit documentation
200 are not met (e.g., lowest differential pressure, supply air
conditions), larger deviations are likely to occur.
20 40 60 80 100
% of Vnom
Volume flow
.
Vmax Setting
. .
Formula for Vmax The Vmax value is the equivalent of the volume
. flow that is
set with a 10 VDC command signal or Vmax override con-
trol. The setting range for adjustments with the AST10
V
Vmax setting = max . 100 % adjuster is.from 20 to 120 %. The percentage figures are
Vnom based on Vnom.
.
Vmin Setting
. .
Formula for Vmin The Vmin value is the equivalent of the .volume flow that is
set with
. a 0 VDC command signal or Vmin override . con-
V trol. Vmin may be set between 20 and 100 % of Vnom
Vmin setting = min . 100 % using the AST10.
Vnom .
If Vmin is set between 20 bis 0 %, the damper will be
closed and leakproof with a command signal of 0 VDC.
In case of value deviation, shut-off can be realized with
input Y2 (see p. 9).
Adjuster AST10
Volume Flow Adjustment on Site

9 1 Liquid crystal display
The volume flow threshold ranges can be adjusted on
2 Plus/minus keys
site using adjuster AST10. To do this, connect the AST10
for changing parameters
2 to the controller
. (see
. AST10 product information). The
3 Cursor key
calibrated Vmin or Vmax values can be set using the keys
(to toggle
Type and U) by the same names. The controller adopts these settings
when the Set key is pressed.
1 4 Save key
(to send data to the In 3P operating mode, the volume flow ranges can be
3 controller) changed only on operator terminals with communication
4 5 Reset key capabilities (e.g., TEC).
for factory settings
5 . .
6 Rocker switch Vn1) / Vmin
6 .
7 Rocker switch Vmax / Y
7
8 Not allocated (reserved
for future applications)
8
9 Socket for connecting cable
(make certain that plug is
. .
inserted correctly) 1) Vn equals Vnom
4
Volume Flow Ranges for TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVS, TVRK

l/s m3/h
Vmax Vmax
Size
Vmin-unit Vmin-unit
from to Vnom from to Vunit
1002) 10 20 95 36 72 342
125 15 30 150 54 108 540
160 25 50 250 90 180 900
200 40 80 405 144 288 1458
250 60 125 615 216 450 2214
315 105 205 1025 378 738 3690
400 170 335 1680 612 1206 6048
Volume Flow Ranges for TVJ/TVT

l/s m3/h
mm
Vmin-unit1) from to Vnom Vmin-unit1) from to Vnom
200 x 100 45 45 215 162 162 774

300 x 100 65 65 320 234 234 1152
400 x 100 85 85 425 306 306 1530
500 x 100 110 105 535 396 378 1926
600 x 100 130 130 650 468 468 2340
200 x 200 85 85 415 306 306 1494
300 x 200 125 125 620 450 450 2232
400 x 200 165 165 825 594 594 2970
500 x 200 205 205 1035 738 738 3726
600 x 200 250 250 1250 900 900 4500
700 x 200 290 290 1450 1044 1044 5220
800 x 200 330 330 1650 1188 1188 5940
300 x 300 185 185 920 666 666 3312
400 x 300 245 245 1230 882 882 4428
500 x 300 305 305 1535 1098 1098 5526
600 x 300 370 370 1850 1332 1332 6660
700 x 300 430 430 2150 1548 1548 7740
800 x 300 490 490 2450 1764 1764 8820
900 x 300 555 555 2770 1998 1998 9972
1000 x 300 620 620 3100 2232 2232 11160
400 x 400 325 325 1630 1170 1170 5868
500 x 400 410 410 2040 1476 1476 7344
600 x 400 490 490 2450 1764 1764 8820
700 x 400 570 570 2850 2052 2052 10260
800 x 400 650 650 3250 2340 2340 11700
900 x 400 735 735 3670 2646 2646 13212
1000 x 400 820 820 4100 2952 2952 14760
500 x 500 510 510 2540 1836 1836 9144
600 x 500 610 610 3050 2196 2196 10980
700 x 500 710 710 3550 2556 2556 12780
800 x 500 810 810 4050 2916 2916 14580
900 x 500 915 915 4570 3294 3294 16452
1000 x 500 1020 1020 5100 3672 3672 18360
600 x 600 730 730 3650 2628 2628 13140
700 x 600 850 850 4250 3060 3060 15300
800 x 600 970 970 4850 3492 3492 17460
900 x 600 1100 1100 5500 3960 3960 19800
1000 x 600 1220 1220 6100 4392 4392 21960
700 x 700 990 990 4950 3564 3564 17820
800 x 700 1140 1140 5700 4104 4104 20520
900 x 700 1280 1280 6400 4608 4608 23040
1000 x 700 1420 1420 7100 5112 5112 25560
800 x 800 1300 1300 6500 4680 4680 23400
900 x 800 1460 1460 7300 5256 5256 26280
1000 x 800 1620 1620 8100 5832 5832 29160
900 x 900 1640 1640 8200 5904 5904 29520
1000 x 900 1820 1820 9100 6552 6552 32760
1000 x 1000 2020 2020 10100 7272 7272 36360
1) Vmin = 0 can also be realized 2) TVR only Values highlighted in gray not allowable for TVT with GLB181.1E/3 due to high torque!
5

Volume flow V in %
as % of Vnom TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVS, TVRK TVJ/TVT Order Code / Ordering Example
80 5 5
60 7 7
40 7 8 Vmin Vmax
20 9 14
15 20 >14 TVZ / 160 / 00 / LN0 / E - 50 - 240 l/s
<15 >20 >14
3)
TVZ / 160 / 00 / LN0 / M - 50 - 240 l/s

3)
TVZ / 160 / 00 / LN0 / S - 240 l/s
TVZ / 160 / 00 / LN0 / F - 100 l/s
Operating mode
E Individual
M Master
S Slave
F Constant value
X 3-point

Operating
Factory settings
mode
E Vmin at required Vmin

M Vmax at required Vmax
S Vmin at 0 %
Vmax at volume flow ratio to master
controller
U 2) 3) Vmin at required volume flow 1

(smaller value)
V
max at required volume flow 2
(larger value)
F 2) Vmin at required volume flow

Vmax at 100 %
2) A constant value controller can be used as a master

3) Indicate configurations for master and slave devices
X Vnom set
when ordering
6
Volume Flow Ranges for TVM Two Duct Combined Unit TVM
l/s m3/h
Size Order Code / Ordering Example
Vmin-unit Vnom Vmin-unit Vnom
125 45 150 162 540
160 75 250 270 900 . .
200 120 405 432 1458 Vwarm Vcold
250 185 615 666 2214
TVM / 160 / LY0 / M - 50 - 240 l/s
. .
Vwarm = Vcold
TVM / 160 / LY0 / F - 400 l/s

Volume flow V in %
Operating mode
E Individual
100 5 7
80 5 10
M Master
60 5 12 F Festwert
40 7 15 X 3-point
20 9 -
10 20 -
<10 >20 -
1) Percentage figures based on actual
Operating Factory settings

mode
min at 5 % min at required

E volume flow warm
M max at required
volume flow (cold) max at 100 %
X nom set nom set
F min at 5 % min at required

Constant volume
max at required flow
Constant volume
flow max at 100 %
7
Key to wire Bedeutung

wires Code colors
G red Phase AC 24 V
G0 black Ground AC 24 V
GLB181.1E/3 series A
Y1 purple Position signal open (3P) or
override control (CON)
Y2 orange Position signal close (3P) or
override control (CON)
Y (Series A) gray Volume flow position signal
0 to 10 VDC and communication
signal
YC (Series B) gray Volume flow position signal
GLB181.1E/3 series B 0 to 10 VDC and communication
signal
UC (Series A) pink Actual value output signal
0 to 10 VDC
U (Series B) pink Actual value output signal
0 to 10 VDC
DIL Switch Settings, GLB181.1E (series A) U (Series A) pink Communication signal, Series A
DIL switch Function Remark

Factory setting:
Wiring
Motor rotational
3 (S3) direction DO NOT Wiring for the 24 VAC voltage supply must be performed
CHANGE! by the customer. Safety transformers are to be used
(EN 60742).
1 and 2 (S1, S2) Not allocated
If several controllers are connected to one 24 VAC net-
work, it is important to ensure that a common neutral or
ground wire is used.
Service Signal Service Connection

Room It is recommended that the signal line for connecting the
24 VAC temperature AST10 adjuster be linked up in an easily accessible
controller location. This avoids having to remove ceiling panels
when service is performed. Suitable locations include:
Switch cabinet spare terminals in room temperature controllers, or wall
or wall mounted
enclosure mounted enclosures.
It is important to ensure that G and G0 are available.
Therefore, a 4-wire connection is required to the com-
missioning point connection.
IMPORTANT
GLB181.1E/3 series A
Series A and B are connected differently. Follow the
relevant recommendations in the documentation for
adjuster AST10.
Room
24 VAC temperature
controller
Switch cabinet
or wall mounted
enclosure
GLB181.1E/3 series B
8
. .
Continuous Controlling between Vmin and Vmax Variable Volume Flow Controlling
Operating Mode CON The GLB 181.1E/3 is connected to the 24 VAC grid. If the
DDC outstation/controller is in the same grid, the com-
24 VAC mand signal can be applied through a single wire. If the
grids are separate, the command signal is connected by
two wires. The actual value signal for the volume flow
can be used.
Command Actual value Several GLB181.1E/3 units can be connected in parallel.
signal of output signal Several volume flow controllers (supply or extract air) are
0 to 10 VDC 0 to 10 VDC operated in parallel by one room temperature . controller.
.
If the terminal units are the same size and Vmin and Vmax
parameters are set at the same values, all the units con-
G G0 Y1 Y2 YC
Y U
UC trol the same volume flow. If the settings differ, the units
control an equal proportion of flow. This allows ratio
control to be achieved between the supply and extract
GLB181.1E/3 series B air controllers.
The variable volume flow control can be overridden
for shut-off and startup using zero-potential switches
(supplied by customer).
Controlling with an External Digital Operator Ter-
minal, Room Temperature Volume Flow Cascade
Operating Mode 3P
Digitaleroperator
Digital Einzelraumregler
terminal
24 VAC
G G0
G G0 Y1 Y2 U
Override Controls
24 VAC
Switch
Function S1 S2 Type
(window of controlling
switch)
Cont. controlling open open VVS,
S1 S2
Shut-off open closed supply or
Fully open closed open extract air
.
Controlling Vmin open open
. KVS,
G G0 Y1 Y2 YC U Controlling Vmax closed closed
supply or
Shut-off open closed extract air
GLB181.1E/3 series B Fully open closed open
9
Slave Control Supply or Extract Air Slave Control

In the case of parallel control of the units, an unfavorable
Room
24 VAC
Raumtem-
temperature difference between supply and extract air can occur if
peratur-Regler
controller the pressure in one duct is too low. Therefore, the more
G G0 Y favorable actual volume flow value (usually of the supply
air) should be used as the command variable for the
second volume flow controller. If the extract air flow is
not to be controlled by the DDC controller, a slave control
is also used.
Ratio control can be achieved using the GLB181.1E/3 i.e.
the reatio of extract air to supply air must be the same
ratio under all operating conditions.
G G0 Y1 Y2 YC U
Outstation/Controller max M max S
=
GLB181.1E/3 series B min M min S
The volume flow ratio is set on the slave controller as

follows:
max S nom M
max setting = 100 %
max M nom S
G G0 Y1 Y2 YC U
Outstation/Controller
GLB181.1E/3 series B If the volume flows are the same, the setting will be
100 %. The maximum setting is 120 %.
Two Duct Combined Unit TVM Volume Flow Control of TVM Units
The two controllers fitted to the dual duct unit TVM (cold
Room
24 VAC
Raumtem-
temperature duct, warm duct) are to be wired by the customer as illu-
peratur-Regler
controller strated in the circuit diagram on this page (including the
G G0 Y 24 VAC/VDC cross-connection).
In most instances, the proportion
. of warm air is increa-
sed from 0 to the required V . warm as a maximum set point.
set as a constant value controller and does not require a
control signal.
G G0 Y1 Y2 YC U For more information and a control diagram, refer to the
Cold Duct Controller TVM product documentation.
possibly to slave controller
G G0 Y1 Y2 YC U
Warm Duct Controller
10
Commissioning Commissioning
A function test for commissioning can be carried out
Check wiring using adjuster AST10 or the DDC outstation/controller.
A defined volume flow is set for both of these units.
Activate power supply
The actual volume flow is calculated on the basis of the
Switch on air conditioning system monitored actual value signal and is compared with the
set value.
In many instances, the faults can result from incorrect
wiring. Therefore, when checking an individual volume
flow controller, first disconnect all lines except for G and
Record . actual value signal U for override G0.
control Vmin. Record the actual value signal U
The power supply is then switched off and a zero point
Record. actual value signal U for override comparison is performed automatically. The actual out-
control Vmax. Record the actual value signal U
put signal is then set to zero for about 2 minutes.
If the actuator drive is disengaged and the damper is
opened manually, the voltage U will increase. Then briefly
Fault Diagnosis disconnect the supply voltage so that the actuator can
be resynchronized.
no
Supply voltage in conformance Check transformer

with Siemens specifications?
Volume flow control is checked by setting a command
etc. signal to which the monitored value must correspond
yes after a short time.Set points are defined by a linear volt-
no
age signal, a switch or adjuster AST10.

Signal U consistent? Controller faulty
Apply the override control and test the desired functions.
yes
The function test can be simplified using the AST10
adjuster. The function test can be simplified using. the
no
Actuator opens
.
Damper AST10 adjuster. The set volume values Vmin and Vmax
and closes? obstructed? can be read. The AST10 can also simulate a command
yes signal. Operating mode and direction of flow in the
actuator are displayed. The Trox factory settings can
no
.
Volume flow Vmin? be restored with the Factory settings key.
Duct pressure
sufficient?
Measurement
yes tubing to the
no
. transducer
Volume flow Vmax? damaged?
yes
no
Volume flow Check room tem-

command signal? perature controller
yes
no
Override controls? Check window

switch, relays etc.
Ordering Example for a Replacement Controller Replacement Controllers

When replacing faulty controllers, controllers calibrated
to the terminal unit type and size must be used. Non-
Siemens GLB181.1E/3, calibrated controllers may only be used as a stopgap
calibrated for TVR / 125 / E0 - 45 - 100 l/s solution.
The following must be specified when ordering a replace-
ment controller:
Unit type and size; for TVM units: whether the unit
is a cold or warm duct controller.
Operating mode
. .
Vmin and Vmax
11
Siemens Adjuster AST10
Contents
Subject Page
Application 2
Function 2
Information regarding operation and use 3
Table of parameters 3
Operation the unit 3
Mounting 4
Connection to GLB... 4
1
AST10 Application
The adjuster AST10 is used to display and set para-
1 meters for Siemens compact controllers GLB181.1E/3
and GDB 181.1E/TR. As the compact controllers are
not outfitted with a trim potentiometer, the AST10 is used
to render the parameters accessible and to visualize
2 them.
Functions
3
The AST10 is connected to the GLB181.E/3 using one of
4 the included connecting cables (GLB... A with clipped
connection, GLB... B with plug-in or clipped connection).
Power is supplied to the AST10 via the connecting cable.
5
Values are shown on a liquid crystal display (LCD). The
AST10 is operated with four keys, two of which are dual
6 function rocker switches.
Srch is displayed when communication is interrupted
7 and during the startup process while the unit carries out
a search to determine which type of device is attached.
8 Values that are altered will blink in the display. After
changing a parameter, send the new value to the con-
nected unit by pressing the Set key. The value will
then stop blinking.
9
The Trox factory settings for the GLB181.1E/3 can be
restored by pressing the Factory settings key.
Any communication problems with the connected device
are signaled by the message Err in the LCD.
1 Liquid crystal
display
2 Plus/minus key to change parameters

3 Cursor key (toggles Type, U and DIR)
4 Save key (to send data to the controller)
5 Reset key to restore factory settings
. .
6 Rocker switch Vn / Vmin
.
7 Rocker switch Vmax / Y
8 Not allocated (reserved for future application)
9 Connecting cable
2
Table of Parameters
Symbol Key Meaning Application
. .
Vn Vn Display of Vnom volume flow Factory setting,
read only!
. .
Vmin [%] Vmin Setting or display of minimum volume flow 20 to 100 % in 1 percent increments
. .
Vmax [%] Vmax Setting or display of maximum volume flow 20 to 120 % in 1 percent increments
YC [V] Y Setting or display of required volume flow 0 to 11 V in 0.05 V increments
DIR Setting or display of direction of rotation of motor Factory setting, DO NOT CHANGE!
Factory setting,
only change if absolutely necessary!
TYP Setting or display of function type con = controlling operation VVS or KVS;
3P = 3-point motor operation + sensor function
(no internal controlling function)
U [V] Display of actual volume flow 0 to 12.8 V in 0.05 V increments
Adjustment, Display and Connecting Elements Operation

Connect AST10 to GLB using compatible connecting
cable (9); wait until message appears on the display.
9 .
Changing Vmin:
. .
Press key 6a Vmin, the required V. min temperature
. will
2 be displayed as a percentage of Vnom (Vn).
Change the displayed percentage value with the plus
or minus key 2. Then press Set key 4. The new value
will be sent to the controller.
1 .
Changing Vmax:
.
3 The required Vmax temperature is. displayed as a .
percentage of Vnom. To change Vmax., press the Vmax
4 key 7 and follow the procedure for Vmin.
.
To control Vmax, a 10 VDC command signal (Y) must
5 be transmitted to GLB. This is done with the Y key
7a on the AST10. Enter the desired command signal
6 6a
and then confirm with the Set key.
7 7a After entering each parameter (value blinks), send the
value to the controller via the Set key 4.
8 To restore the Trox factory settings, press the Factory
settings key 5.
Display of the Actual Value of the Output Signal

U or UC
To display the actual value of the output signal in volts,
press key 3 <> This applies to all operating modes.
. .
Information Regarding Operation and Use Display of Vnom (Vn)
When an AST10 is connected to a type A or B GLB, the To
. display the factory. reference values (variables for
parameters can be displayed and changed during opera- Vnom), press key 6a (Vn).
tion. With type A GLB, the connecting cable with an
unused wire end is used, and with type B, the wire with
the plug-in connection is used. IMPORTANT
When the AST10 is connected to a type B GLB via the Changes made in the operating mode of the con-
connecting cable with an unused wire, care must be troller (from con to 3Poder or vice versa) only
taken to ensure that the communication signal is trans- take effect after the device has been reset (briefly
mitted over the same wire as the 0 to 10 VDC command cut off the supply voltage to the controller).
signal. Therefore, when the AST10 is connected, the
command signal must be disconnected! If a command
signal is to be transmitted nonetheless, this can be done
by setting the required volume flow via the Y key.
3
AST10 Connection to GLB..., Series A Connection to GLB...

in the control cabinet
The AST10 is connected to GLB as illustrated in the
circuit diagrams on this page.
With GLB Series A, the included connecting cable with
an unused wire end is used; then connect YC on the
AST10 with UC on GLB Series A.
For the connection with GLB Series B, use the
connecting cable with the ready-made plug.
The connecting cable with an unused wire end can also
be used for Series B if the ceiling panels are closed but
changes still need to be undertaken. In this case, its
advisable to establish a connection from the junction box
(YC must be available for this).
Connecting cable
with unused wire ends However, for the duration of the communication, the
line to clamp YC must be disconnected!
GLB..., Series A
AST10 Connection to GLB..., Series B AST10 Connection to GLB..., Series B

in the control cabinet directly to the unit
Connecting cable
Connecting cable with two-sided
with unused wire ends plug-in connection
GLB..., Series B GLB..., Series B
Strain Relief Clamp on the Connecting Cable Mounting Advisory

AST10 When using the connecting cable with a plug-in connec-
tion (with GLB Type B) the strain relief clamp attached
GLB181.1E/3 to the connecting cable is to be used as illustrated here.
Connecting cable
Strain relief clamp
4
Siemens Volume Flow Controller
VAV Modular ASV181.1E/3
Contents
Subject Page
Application 2
Functions 3
Characteristic curves 3
Functions 3
Pressure-independent control characteristics 4
Volume flow control and adjustment 4
Adjuster AST10 4
Order codes 7
Terminal connections 8
Continuous controlling, override control 9
Examples of application 10
Commissioning 11
Design changes reserved All rights reserved Gebrder Trox GmbH (12/2001) Leaflet No. E016EM5
1
Compact Controller ASV181.1E/3 Application

The Siemens electronic volume flow controller
ASV181.1E/3 is a control unit for VAV terminal units. The
membrane pressure transducer and control electronics
are integrated into one housing. A separate actuator is
connected for damper adjustment. These controllers are
mainly used in VAV terminal units with specialized func-
tions such as spring return, torque > 10 Nm or adjustable
switch functions on the actuator.
For variable volume flow control, a suitable room tem-
perature controller (or air quality controller), a DDC out-
station or a similar device must be used. A 0 to 10 VDC
signal or three-point signal (TEC controller, DESIGO
RXC31.1 etc.) can be used as the voltage range. To do
this, the volume flow controller ASV181.1E/3 is deacti-
vated. Switches or relays with a maximum of 2 set points
are used for constant volume flow control.
The ASV181.1E/3 is not outfitted with adjustment knobs
Vmin and Vmax. All controller parameters factory-set by
Trox. The customer does not need to make any adjust-
ments. As soon as the supply voltage and room tempera-
ture controller have been connected, the terminal unit is
ready for use.
Any volume flow changes to the AST10 that may be
necessary can easily be carried out by the customer. For
parallel operation, several controllers can be connected
Socket for AST10 connecting cable up to one room temperature controller. Supply or extract
Transducer tubing connector air slave control can be realized.
Connecting cable to operator terminal or to DDC
Static Measuring
Connecting cable for actuator
The actual value of the volume flow is monitored as a
Mounting lug
standard, linear electrical signal and can be switched to a
DDC or used for the display. The voltage range for the
actual and command value is standardized at 0 to 10 VDC.
Volume flow is measured with a membrane pressure
transducer. In automatic, recovered zero point calibration
via an integrated air valve, minimum flow briefly occurs in
the measuring line. This flow level is so low that as a rule
the measuring element is not soiled. However, if the unit
is used in unclean air, a VAV a plastic or coated terminal
unit should be used.
Operating Modes IMPORTANT

The ASV181.1E/3 has two operating modes, CON and Make certain that in critical situations the VAV termi-
3P (see circuit diagram below). nal unit and membrane pressure transducer are tested
for the resistance of their materials to hazardous
materials and particle concentrations in ambient air.
Operating Mode CON Operating Mode 3P
Operator terminal with

Room temperature controller communication capability, DDC
actual volume flow 3-point signal 24 VAC

required volume flow, 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 10 VDC
ASV181.1E/3 Actuator ASV181.1E/3 Actuator
2
Characteristic Curve of the Actual Value Signal Functions

The volume flow is measured with a membrane pressure
transducer. The effective pressure pw of the differential
Vnom pressure sensor in the VAV terminal unit is measured in
the membrane pressure transducer of the ASV181.1E/3
Vactual = Vnom U
10 and linearized. The volume flow is calculated by a micro-
Volume flow
processor in the controller.

The actual volume flow is available as a linear voltage
signal U. The measurement range (reference value) is set
during factory calibration to suit the unit size in such a
way that 10 VDC always corresponds to the unit nominal
volume flow rate (Vnom).
Vmin unit The required volume flow is set by the room temperature
controller or by switches. The controller determines the
0 Actual value signal UC 10 VDC required volume flow in accordance with the characteri-
stic curve shown in the illustration and compares this
with the actual value. The external damper actuator is
controlled according to the volume flow tolerances. The
factory-set volume flow ranges Vmin and Vmax can be
altered by the customer using a Siemens AST10 adjuster,
Characteristic Curve of the Command Variable which can also be used to change the operating mode.
Vnom IMPORTANT
V max
The operating mode must be set for each system
Y
(Vmax -Vmin) + V min because otherwise the desired function will not be
Volume flow
Vreq =
10 available!
Operating Mode CON

Variable volume flow
Vmin Using the command variables shown in the illustration
Vmin unit as a basis, the ASV181.1E/3 calculates the volume flow,
which can range from Vmin to Vmax. Override controls
0 Actual command signal Y 10 VDC CLOSED or OPEN can be realized.
Constant volume flow
To realize override control as well as constant volume
flows Vmin and Vmax, wire the input terminals for the com-
mand signal via relays or contacts.
Command signal range limiting
In the DDC outstation, the command variable must be
limited for settings between Vmin = 0 % and Vmax =
100 %. In this situation, the full published volume range
can be used for future adjustment via the BMS. If the
design volume flow rates are set in the unit, a full voltage
signal range of 0-10 or 2-10 VDC can be used. However,
these settings can only be changed by using the AST10,
which involves gaining access to the terminal unit.
(Operating Mode 3P)

In this operating mode, the internal controller electronics
are inactivated. Only the reference value is factory set.
Any calibrated Vmin and Vmax values have no impact on
function.
3
Duct Pressure-Independent Control Characteristics Volume Flow Control

The volume flow controller works independently of duct
1000 pressure, which means that pressure fluctuations result
Pa
in only transient changes in volume flow.
800
To prevent destabilization of volume flow control, a dead
600 zone is provided within which the damper does not

move. This dead zone, in conjunction with measuring
400 tolerances, produces the volume flow deviation illus-
trated here.
200 If the conditions mentioned in the product documenta-
tion are not met (e.g., lowest differential pressure, supply
air conditions), larger deviations are likely to occur.
20 40 60 80 100
in % of Vnom
Volume flow
Formula for Vmax Vmax Setting
The Vmax value is the equivalent of the volume flow that is

. V
Vmax setting = max . 100 % set with a 10 VDC command signal or Vmax override con-
Vnom trol. The setting range for adjustments with the AST10
adjuster is from 20 to 120 %. The percentage figures are
based on Vnom.
Formula for Vmin Vmin Setting

The Vmin value is the equivalent of the volume flow that

. V is set with a 0 VDC command signal or Vmin override
Vmin setting = min . 100 % control. Vmin may be set between 20 and 100 % of Vnom
Vnom
using the AST10.
If Vmin is set between 20 and 0 %, a command signal of
0 VDC will close the damper, creating a leakproof seal. In
Adjuster AST10 case of value deviation, shut-off can be realized with
input Y2 (see p. 9).
9 1 Liquid crystal display Volume Flow Adjustment on Site

2 Plus/minus keys The volume flow ranges can be adjusted on site using
for changing parameters
2 adjuster AST10. To do this, connect the AST10 to the
3 Cursor key controller (see AST10 product information). The cali-
(to toggle brated Vmin or Vmax values can be set using the keys by
Type and U) the same names. The controller adopts these settings
1
4 Save key when the Set key is pressed.
3 (to send data to the In 3P operating mode, the volume flow ranges can be
controller) changed only on operator terminals with communication
4
5 Reset key capabilities (e.g., TEC).
5
for factory settings
6 Rocker switch Vn1) / Vmin
6
7 7 Rocker switch Vmax / Y
8 8 Not allocated (reserved
for future application)
9 Socket for connecting cable

(make certain that plug is
inserted correctly)
1) Vn equals Vnom
4

l/s m3/h
Size
Vmax Vmax
Vmin Vmin
unit from to Vnom unit from to Vnom
100 2) 10 20 95 36 72 342
125 15 30 150 54 108 540
160 25 50 250 90 180 900
200 40 80 405 144 288 1458
250 60 125 615 216 450 2214
315 105 205 1025 378 738 3690
400 170 335 1680 612 1206 6048

l/s m3/h
mm
Vmin unit1) from to Vnom Vmin unit1) from to Vnom
200 x 100 45 45 215 162 162 774

300 x 100 65 65 320 234 234 1152
400 x 100 85 85 425 306 306 1530
500 x 100 105 110 535 378 396 1926
600 x 100 130 130 650 468 468 2340
200 x 200 85 85 415 306 306 1494
300 x 200 125 125 620 450 450 2232
400 x 200 165 165 825 594 594 2970
500 x 200 205 205 1035 738 738 3726
600 x 200 250 250 1250 900 900 4500
700 x 200 290 290 1450 1044 1044 5220
800 x 200 330 330 1650 1188 1188 5940
300 x 300 185 185 920 666 666 3312
400 x 300 245 245 1230 882 882 4428
500 x 300 305 305 1535 1098 1098 5526
600 x 300 370 370 1850 1332 1332 6660
700 x 300 430 430 2150 1548 1548 7740
800 x 300 490 490 2450 1764 1764 8820
900 x 300 555 555 2770 1998 1998 9972
1000 x 300 620 620 3100 2232 2232 11160
400 x 400 325 325 1630 1170 1170 5868
500 x 400 410 410 2040 1476 1476 7344
600 x 400 490 490 2450 1764 1764 8820
700 x 400 570 570 2850 2052 2052 10260
800 x 400 650 650 3250 2340 2340 11700
900 x 400 735 735 3670 2646 2646 13212
1000 x 400 820 820 4100 2952 2952 14760
500 x 500 510 510 2540 1836 1836 9144
600 x 500 610 610 3050 2196 2196 10980
700 x 500 710 710 3550 2556 2556 12780
800 x 500 810 810 4050 2916 2916 14580
900 x 500 915 915 4570 3294 3294 16452
1000 x 500 1020 1020 5100 3672 3672 18360
600 x 600 730 730 3650 2628 2628 13140
700 x 600 850 850 4250 3060 3060 15300
800 x 600 970 970 4850 3492 3492 17460
900 x 600 1100 1100 5500 3960 3960 19800
1000 x 600 1220 1220 6100 4392 4392 21960
700 x 700 990 990 4950 3564 3564 17820
800 x 700 1140 1140 5700 4104 4104 20520
900 x 700 1280 1280 6400 4608 4608 23040
1000 x 700 1420 1420 7100 5112 5112 25560
800 x 800 1300 1300 6500 4680 4680 23400
900 x 800 1460 1460 7300 5256 5256 26280
1000 x 800 1620 1620 8100 5832 5832 29160
900 x 900 1640 1640 8200 5904 5904 29520
1000 x 900 1820 1820 9100 6552 6552 32760
1000 x 1000 2020 2020 10100 7272 7272 36360
1) Vmin = 0 can also be realized 2) TVR only
5
Volume Flow Control Tolerances 1) Single Duct Unit

Volume flow V in %
as % of Vnom TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVS, TVRK TVJ/TVT Order Code / Ordering Example
80 5 5
60 7 7
40 7 8 Vmin Vmax
20 9 14
10 20 >14 TVZ / 160 / 00 / LP3 / E - 50 - 240 l/s
<10 >20 >14
3)
TVZ / 160 / 00 / LP3 / M - 50 - 240 l/s
3)
TVZ / 160 / 00 / LP3 / S - 240 l/s
TVZ / 160 / 00 / LP3 / F - 100 l/s
Operating mode
E Individual
M Master
S Slave
F Constant value
X 3-point

Operating mode Factory settings

Vmin at 0 %
S Vmax at volume flow ratio to master
controller
Vmin at required volume flow 1

2) 3) (smaller value)
U
Vmax at required volume flow 2
(larger value)
Vmin at required volume flow

F 2)
Vmax at 100 %
2) A constant value controller can be used as a master X Vnom set

3) Indicate configurations for master and slave devices when ordering
6
l/s m3/h
Size Order Code / Ordering Example
Vmin unit Vnom Vmin unit Vnom
125 45 150 162 540
160 75 250 270 900 . .
200 120 405 432 1458 Vwarm Vcold
250 185 615 666 2214
TVM / 160 / LP5 / M - 50 - 240 l/s
. .
Vwarm = Vcold
TVM / 160 / LP5 / F - 400 l/s

Volume Flow Control Tolerances for TVM 1)
Volume flow V in %
Operating mode
E Individual
100 5 7
80 5 10
M Master
60 5 12 F Constant value
40 7 15 X 3-point
20 9 -
10 20 -
<10 >20 -

mode

E volume flow warm
M max at required
volume flow (cold) max at 100 %
X nom set nom set

Constant volume
F max at required flow
Constant volume
flow max at 100 %
7

Key to Wire colors Bedeutung
wires Code
G G0 Y1 Y2 YC U G red Phase AC 24 V
G0 black Ground AC 24 V
ASV181.1E/3 Y1 purple Position signal open (3P)
or override control (CON)
Y2 orange Position signal open (3P)
or override control (CON)
YC gray Volume flow position signal
0-10 VDC and
communication signal
U pink Actual value of output signal
0-10 VDC
Wiring
Wiring for the 24 VAC voltage supply must be performed
by the customer. Safety transformers are to be used
(EN 60742).
If several controllers are connected to one 24 VAC grid,
it is important to ensure that a common neutral or ground
wire is used.
Service Signal ASV181.1E/3 Service Connection

24 V
Room
temperature
AST10 adjuster be linked up in an easily accessible
controller location. This avoids having to remove ceiling panels

y
when service is performed. Suitable locations include:
Switch cabinet spare terminals in room temperature controllers, or wall
or wall mounted mounted enclosures.
enclosure
It is important to ensure that G and G0 are available.
Therefore, a 4-wire connection is required to the commis-
sioning point connection.
G G0 YC
ASV181.1E/3
8
Continuous Controlling between Vmin and Vmax Variable Volume Flow Controlling
Operating Mode CON The ASV181.1E/3 is connected to the 24 VAC grid. If the
DDC outstation/controller is in the same grid, the com-
24 V mand signal can be applied via a single wire. If the grids
are separate, the command signal is connected by two
wires. The actual value signal for the volume flow can be
used.
Command Actual value
Several ASV181.1E/3 units can be connected in parallel.
signal of output signal
0 to 10 VDC 0 to 10 VDC Several volume flow controllers (supply or extract air) are
operated in parallel by one room temperature controller.
If the terminal units are the same size and Vmin and Vmax
parameters are set at the same values, all the units con-
trol the same volume flow. If the settings differ, the units
G G0 Y1 Y2 YC U control an equal proportion of flow. This allows ratio con-
trol to be achieved between the supply and extract air
ASV181.1E/3 controllers.
The variable volume flow control can be overridden for
shut-off and startup using zero-potential switches
(supplied by customer).
Controlling with an External Digital Operator Terminal
Room Temperature Volume Flow Cascade
Operating Mode 3P
Digital operator terminal

24 V
G G0
G G0 Y1 Y2 U
ASV181.1E/3
Override Controls
24 V
Switch
Function S2 Type
S1
(window of controlling
switch)
Continuous
open open VVS,
S1 S2 Controlling
supply
Shut-off open closed
or extract air
Fully open closed open
.
Controlling Vmin open open
. KVS,
G G0 Y1 Y2 YC U Controlling Vmax closed closed
supply
Shut-off open closed or extract air
ASV181.1E/3 Fully open closed open
9
Slave Control Supply or Extract Air Slave Control (Master/Slave)

In the case of parallel control of the units, an unfavorable
Room difference between supply and extract air can occur if
24 V temperature
controller the pressure in one duct is too low. Therefore, the actual
G G0 Y volume flow value (usually the value of the supply air)
should be used as the command variable for the volume
flow controller of the slave. If the extract air flow is not to
be controlled by the DDC controller, a slave control is
also used.
Ratio control can be achieved using the ASV181.1E/3
i.e. the ratio of extract air to supply air must be the same
under all operating conditions.
G G0 Y1 Y2 YC U
DDC outstation/controller Vmax M Vmax S
ASV181.1E/3 =
Vmin M Vmin S
The volume flow ratio is set on the slave controller as

follows:
Vmax S Vnom M
Vmax setting = 100 %
G G0 Y1 Y2 YC U Vmax M Vnom S
Slave controller ASV181.1E/3

100 %. The maximum setting is 120 %.
Two Duct Combined Unit TVM Volume Flow Controller of TVM Units
The two controllers fitted to the dual duct unit TVM (cold
24 V Room temper-
ature controller duct, warm duct) are to be wired by the customer as
illustrated in the circuit diagram on this page (including
G G0 Y
the 24 VAC cross-connection).
In most instances, the proportion of warm air is increased
from 0 to the required Vwarm as a maximum set point.
set as a constant value controller and does not require a
control signal.
G G0 Y1 Y2 YC U
For more information, refer to the TVM product docu-
mentation.
Cold duct controller ASV181.1E/3
possibly to
slave controller
G G0 Y1 Y2 YC U
Warm duct controller ASV181.1E/3
10
A function test for commissioning can be carried out
Check wiring using adjuster AST10 or the DDC outstation/controller.
Activate power supply A defined volume flow is set for both of these units.
The actual volume flow is calculated on the basis of the
Switch on air conditioning system monitored actual value signal and is compared with the
set value.
In many instances the faults can result from incorrect
wiring. Therefore, when checking an individual volume
flow controller, first disconnect all lines except for
Record actual value signal U for override control V min
G and G0.
Record the actual value signal U
The power supply is then switched off and a zero point
Record actual value signal U for override control V max comparison is performed automatically. The actual out-
Record the actual value signal U put signal is then set to zero for about 2 minutes.
opened manually, the voltage will increase. Then briefly
Fault Diagnosis disconnect the supply voltage so that the actuator can
be resynchronized.
no
Supply voltage in conformance Check trans- Volume flow control is checked by setting a command
with Siemens specifications? former etc. signal to which the monitored value must correspond
yes
after a short time. Set points are defined by a linear volt-
age signal, a switch or by adjuster AST10.
no
Signal U consistent? Controller faulty Apply the override control and test the desired functions.
The function test can be simplified using the AST10 ad-
yes juster. The set volume values Vmin and Vmax can be read.
no
Actuator opens Damper The AST10 can also simulate a command signal. Oper-
and closes? obstructed? ating mode and direction of flow in the actuator are
displayed. The Trox factory settings can be restored with
yes
the Factory settings key.
no

sufficient?
Measurement
yes tubing to the
no
Volume flow Vmax? transducer

damaged?
yes
no
Volume flow Check room tem-

command signal? perature controller
yes
no
Check window
Override controls?
switch, relays etc.

Siemens ASV181.1E/3, to the terminal unit type and size must be used. Non-
calibrated controllers may only be used as a stopgap
vorjustiert fr TVR / 125 / E0 - 45 - 100 l/s
solution.
ment controller:
Unit type and size; for TVM units: whether the unit is a
cold or warm duct controller
Operating mode
Vmin and Vmax
11
Siemens Actuator
1
Subject
Contents
GIB131.1E
GLB131.1E
GEB131.1E
GCA131.1E
GBB131.1E
GMA131.1E
4
4
3
3
2
2
Page
Design changes reserved All rights reserved Gebrder Trox GmbH (12/2001) Leaflet No. E016EM6
Siemens Actuator
GLB131.1E Actuator GLB131.1E
Application
Maintenance free damper actuator; with 10 Nm torque;
for three-point control of VAV terminal units outfitted
with Siemens-Landis & Staefa volume flow controllers
ASV181.1E/3.
For technical data, see the applicable Siemens product
documentation.
Function
The actuator is factory mounted, fixed to the damper
shaft, and factory-wired to the volume flow controller.
The integral rotation angle limiter is set, and the actuator
is overload protected. When the end stops are reached,
the actuator stops automatically. No limit switches are
required.
For manual adjustment, the gears can be disengaged via
a button.
Shaft clamp Connecting cable

Gear release button Rotation angle limiter
Duct position display
GBB131.1E Actuator GBB131.1E
Application
Maintenance free damper actuator with 20 Nm torque;
for three-point control of VAV terminal units outfitted with
Siemens-Landis & Staefa volume flow controllers
ASV181.1E/3.
documentation.

Function
The actuator is factory mounted, fixed to the damper
shaft, and factory-wired to the volume flow controller.
The integral rotation angle limiter is set, and the actuator
the actuator stops automatically. No limit switches are
required.

a button.
Shaft clamp Duct position display

Gear release button Connecting cable
2
Siemens Actuator
GEB131.1E Actuator GEB131.1E
Application
ASV181.1E/3.
documentation.
Function

The actuator is factory-mounted on the damper shaft
and factory-wired to the volume flow controller. The
integrated rotation angle limiter is calibrated, and the
reached, the motor automatically comes to a standstill.
No limit switches are needed.
a button.

GIB131.1E Actuator GIB131.1E
Application
ASV181.1E/3.
documentation.

Function
The actuator is factory mounted on the damper shaft
and factory-wired to the volume flow controller. The
integrated rotation angle limiter is calibrated, and the
reached, the motor automatically comes to a standstill.
No limit switches are needed.
a button.

3
Siemens Actuator
GMA131.1E Actuator GMA131.1E
Application
Maintenance free actuator with 7 Nm torque and spring
return; for three-point control of VAV terminal units outfit-
ted with Siemens-Landis & Staefa volume flow control-
lers ASV181.1E/3.
The actuator is used in the event of a power failure when,
for safety reasons, either an open or a closed damper
position is required.
documentation.

Function
factory-wired to the volume flow controller. The inte-
grated rotation angle limiter is calibrated, and the actuator
the motor automatically comes to a standstill. No limit
switches are needed.
A hexagonal wrench can be used to perform manual
Shaft clamp Duct position display adjustments on the actuator, which can be secured with
a screwdriver.
Hand adjustment Connecting cable
Gear arrestor
GCA131.1E Actuator GCA131.1E
Application
Maintenance free damper actuator with 16 Nm torque
and spring return; for volume flow controllers outfitted
with Siemens-Landis & Staefa actuators ASV181.1E/3.
The actuator is used in the event of a power failure when,
for safety reasons, either an open or a closed damper
position is required.
documentation.
Function
factory-wired to the volume flow controller. The inte-
grated rotation angle limiter is calibrated and the actuator
the motor automatically comes to a standstill. No limit
switches are needed.
a hexagonal wrench.
Hand adjustment Connecting cable
Gear arrestor
4
Honeywell
Compact Volume Flow Controller W7751H2009
Contents
Subject Page
Application 2
Functions 3
On-site changes in volume flow 3
Volume flow ranges for single duct units 4
Order codes 6
Commissioning 8
1
Honeywell
Compact Controller W7751H2009 Application

The Honeywell electronic volume flow controller
W7751H2009 is a complete control unit for volume flow
1 3 control in VAV systems. The dynamic differential pressure
transducers, actuators and electronic controls are inte-
2 grated into one housing. A LON bus interface makes the
unit suitable for systems using LON bus technology. For
technical data regarding LON interfaces, consult the
applicable Honeywell product documentation.
The.W7751H2009. is not outfitted with adjustment knobs
5 for Vmin and Vmax settings. The controllers are factory-
calibrated by Trox to the required volume flow using an
OEM tool. All remaining function parameters are set on
site by Honeywell technicians.
4 An operator terminal (T7560/T7460; on customers prem-
ises; see Honeywell product documentation) is used to
control room temperature and volume flow.
Standard filtration in air conditioning systems allows use
of the W7751H2009 without dust protection filters.
Commissioning
The controllers are integrated into the LON network via
the system integrator (binding). These services are to be
provided by the system builder or the controller vendor,
and are to be integrated into the planning and bid sub-
mission phases.
Any additional changes in volume flow can be carried
out on site via the LON bus. Supply or extract air slave
control can also be realized (contact Honeywell).
1 Shaft clamp
2 Rotation angle limiter
3 Position display
6 Service pin1)
1) Hole in circuit board; operate switch

with non-metallic pin only.
2
Honeywell
Functions Volume Flow Ranges

.
The volume flow is measured according to the dynamic The unit nominal flow rate Vnom is stored as a parameter.
differential pressure principle. The effective pressure of This value must not be exceeded or changed. The range
the differential pressure sensor in the terminal unit allows for minimum and maximum design volume flow can be
the detection of a partial volume flow passing through changed, but the limits given in the tables must be
the transducer. This partial volume flow, which is propor- observed. For constant volume flow control, both para-
tional to the total volume flow, is measured and tempera- meters can be set to the same value.
ture-compensated using two temperature-dependent
resistors. The volume flow is calculated by a micropro-
cessor in the controller. The characteristic curve of the
effective pressure is reflected in the controller so that the The volume flow ranges can be adjusted on site using
linearization can be carried out by the computer. As a suitable programming aids (software, central control
result, the linearized volume flow is presented as a value unit). The controllers must be wired to the LON network
in physical units. and the supply voltage must be present. For detailed
The required volume flow is calculated by the room information regarding changing of parameters, consult
. tem- the relevant Honeywell product documentation.
perature
. control circuit between the limit values Vmin and
Vmax. Special operating conditions (presence detectors
and window switches) can be taken into account. Adjustment Guidelines
The computed volume flow is compared with the actual .
Vmin values that fall below the minimum values given
volume flow. The damper actuator is controlled in ac-
in the table should not be entered, as this could desta-
cordance with the volume flow tolerances. The para-
bilize volume flow control.
meters relevant to volume flow control are factory-pro- . .
grammed. After the customer has set the address, the Vmin- and Vmax values must not be confused when they
controllers are ready for use. are entered.
No other parameters for volume flow control such as
actuator running times, unit nominal flows etc. may be
changed.
3
Honeywell
Volume Flow Ranges TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVS, TVRK

l/s m3/h
Nominal
Vmin Vmax Vmin Vmax

size
Vmin1) from to Vmin1) from to

unit
to Vnom unit
to Vnom
1002) 10 75 30 95 36 270 108 342
125 15 120 45 150 54 432 162 540
160 25 200 75 250 90 720 270 900
200 40 325 120 405 144 1170 432 1458
250 60 490 185 615 216 1764 666 2214
315 105 820 310 1025 378 2952 1116 3690
400 170 1345 505 1680 612 4842 1818 6048

l/s m3/h
mm
Vmin unit1) from to to Vnom Vmin unit1) from to to Vnom
200 x 100 45 170 65 215 162 612 234 774
300 x 100 65 255 95 320 234 918 342 1152
400 x 100 85 340 130 425 306 1224 468 1530
500 x 100 105 430 160 535 378 1548 576 1926
600 x 100 130 520 195 650 468 1872 702 2340
200 x 200 85 330 125 415 306 1188 450 1494
300 x 200 125 495 185 620 450 1782 666 2232
400 x 200 165 660 250 825 594 2376 900 2970
500 x 200 205 830 310 1035 738 2988 1116 3726
600 x 200 250 1000 375 1250 900 3600 1350 4500
700 x 200 290 1160 435 1450 1044 4176 1566 5220
800 x 200 330 1320 495 1650 1188 4752 1782 5940
300 x 300 185 735 275 920 666 2646 990 3312
400 x 300 245 985 370 1230 882 3546 1332 4428
500 x 300 305 1230 460 1535 1098 4428 1656 5526
600 x 300 370 1480 555 1850 1332 5328 1998 6660
700 x 300 430 1720 645 2150 1548 6192 2322 7740
800 x 300 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820
900 x 300 555 2215 830 2770 1998 7974 2988 9972
1000 x 300 620 2480 930 3100 2232 8928 3348 11160
400 x 400 325 1305 490 1630 1170 4698 1764 5868
500 x 400 410 1630 610 2040 1476 5868 2196 7344
600 x 400 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820
700 x 400 570 2280 855 2850 2052 8208 3078 10260
800 x 400 650 2600 975 3250 2340 9360 3510 11700
900 x 400 735 2935 1100 3670 2646 10566 3960 13212
1000 x 400 820 3280 1230 4100 2952 11808 4428 14760
500 x 500 510 2030 760 2540 1836 7308 2736 9144
600 x 500 610 2440 915 3050 2196 8784 3294 10980
700 x 500 710 2840 1065 3550 2556 10224 3834 12780
800 x 500 810 3240 1215 4050 2916 11664 4374 14580
900 x 500 915 3655 1370 4570 3294 13158 4932 16452
1000 x 500 1020 4080 1530 5100 3672 14688 5508 18360
600 x 600 730 2920 1095 3650 2628 10512 3942 13140
700 x 600 850 3400 1275 4250 3060 12240 4590 15300
800 x 600 970 3880 1455 4850 3492 13968 5238 17460
900 x 600 1100 4400 1650 5500 3960 15840 5940 19800
1000 x 600 1220 4880 1830 6100 4392 17568 6588 21960
700 x 700 990 3960 1485 4950 3564 14256 5346 17820
800 x 700 1140 4560 1710 5700 4104 16416 6156 20520
900 x 700 1280 5120 1920 6400 4608 18432 6912 23040
1000 x 700 1420 5680 2130 7100 5112 20448 7668 25560
800 x 800 1300 5200 1950 6500 4680 18720 7020 23400
900 x 800 1460 5840 2190 7300 5256 21024 7884 26280
1000 x 800 1620 6480 2430 8100 5832 23328 8748 29160
900 x 900 1640 6560 2460 8200 5904 23616 8856 29520
1000 x 900 1820 7280 2730 9100 6552 26208 9828 32760
1000 x 1000 2020 8080 3030 10100 7272 29088 10908 36360
1) Vmin = 0 can also be realized 2) TVR only
4
Honeywell

Volume flow V in %
as % of Vnom TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVS, TVRK TVJ/TVT
Order Codes / Examples
80 5 5
60 7 7
40 7 8 Vmin Vmax
20 9 14
10 20 >14 TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / HM0 / E - 50 - 240 l/s
<10 >20 >14
TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / HM0 / M - 50 - 240 l/s

TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / HM0 / S - 50 - 240 l/s
TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / HM0 / F - 100 l/s
Operating mode
E Individual
M Master
S Slave
F Constant


Vmin at 0 %
S Vmax at Vmax, equivalent of volume
flow ratio to master controller

F 2)
Vmax at 100 %
5
Honeywell
Volume Flow Ranges TVM Dual Duct Unit TVM

l/s m3/h
Nominal Order Codes / Examples
size Vmin unit Vnom Vmin unit Vnom
125 45 150 162 540
160 75 250 270 900 . .
Vwarm Vcold
200 120 405 432 1458
250 185 615 666 2214
TVM-R / 160 / HQ0 / M - 50 - 240 l/s
. .
Vwarm = Vcold
TVM-R / 160 / HQ0 / F - 400 l/s

Volume flow V in %
Operating mode
as % of VNenn TVMcold TVM total
E Individual
100 5 7
M Master
80 5 10
F Constant value
60 5 12
40 7 15
20 9 -
10 20 -
<10 >20 -
1) Percentage figures based on actual Volume Flow Parameters
Operating Factory setting

mode
E min adjustment at
min at 0 %
required volume flow
E
max at required warm
M
volume flow (cold)
F max at 100 %
6
Honeywell

1, 2 Supply voltage (24 V)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Connection for Wall Module T7560/T7460

W7751H2009 4 Command signal input
5 Ground, neutral, non-earthed
6 Temperature signal input, sensor
7 Bypass switch input
8 LED
Triac Output for Valve Actuator,

Fan or Reheat Coils
9 Position signal OPEN
10 Position signal CLOSED
11, 12 LON bus
LED Status Information Wiring

Wiring for the 24 VAC supply voltage must be performed
LED status Controller status by the customer. Safety transformers are to be used
Off No supply voltage (EN 60742).
Not in working order it is important to ensure that a common neutral or ground
On or not configured wire is used.
Slow The earth terminals (terminal 3) of each controller in the
Blinking Running, normal communication system must be connected to a high-value earth junction
box. Lines should be as short as possible and wires
Fast Alarm ready should be at least 1-2 mm wide.
Blinking or in manual test mode
7
Honeywell
A function test cannot be carried out without the other
Check wiring components being connected and without functioning
Switch on supply voltage communication.
Switch on control and air conditioning systems In many cases, incorrect wiring can give rise to system
malfunctions. Therefore, a careful check should be
carried out to ensure that all connections are correct.
opened manually, the voltage will increase. This can be
As a rule, commissioning of control systems confirmed with the aid of a connected laptop computer
is carried out by Honeywell technicians. or in the central control unit. After manual adjustment,
For information regarding commissioning the actuator must be moved back to its original position.
(LON networks, communication, binding,
software etc.), consult the releavant Honeywell Volume flow control is checked by comparing preset
product documentation. values in the software with the actual values displayed.

Faulty controllers must be replaced by units that are cali-
Honeywell compact volume flow controller brated to the type and size of terminal unit being used.
Since every LON controller has its own LON ID number,
W7751H2009,
binding must first be performed (network replace) in
calibrated for TVR / 125 / E0 - 45 - 100 l/s order to restore functionality.
ment controller:
Operating mode
. .
Vmin and Vmax
Commissioning no. and delivery date of the defective
controller
8
Honeywell Volume Flow Controller W7751F2003
Contents
Subject Page
Application 2
Functions 3
On-site changes in volume flow 3
Order code 6
Commissioning 8
1
Volume Flow Controller W7751F2003 Application

The Honeywell electronic volume flow controller
2 W7751F2003 is a digital volume flow controller for VAV
terminal units in VVS systems. A dynamic differential
pressure transducer and controller electronics are inte-
grated into one housing. A suitable actuator is integrated
as well.
The units LON bus interface enables use in systems with
LON bus technology. For technical data regarding the
3 LON interface, consult the applicable Honeywell product
documentation.
The.W7751F2003. is not outfitted with adjustment knobs
for Vmin and Vmax settings. The controllers are factory-
calibrated (by Trox) to the specified volume flow using
1 an OEM tool. All remaining parameters for the required
functions are set on site by Honeywell technicians.
An operator terminal (T7560/T7460; customers premi-
ses; see Honeywell product documentation) is used to
control room temperature and/ volume flow.
Standard filtration in air conditioning systems allows use
of the W7751F2003 without dust protection filters.
Commissioning
The controllers are integrated into the LON network via
the system integrator (binding). These services are to be
provided by the system builder or the controller vendor,
and are to be integrated into the planning and bid sub-
mission phases.
Any further changes in volume flow are to be carried out
on site via the LON bus. Supply or extract air slave
control and other control functions can also be realized
(by arrangment with Honeywell). Controller functions can
also be realized (contact Honeywell).
4 5
1 Terminal block
3 LED function display
4 Service pin
5 Additional LON bus connection
2
Functions Volume Flow Ranges

.
The volume flow is measured according to the dynamic The unit nominal flow rate (Vnom) is stored as a parame-
differential pressure principle. The effective pressure of ter. This value must not be exceeded or changed. The
the differential pressure sensor passing through the range for minimum and maximum design volume flow
transducer allows the detection of a partial volume flow. can be changed, but the limits given in the tables must
This partial volume flow, which is proportional to the be observed. For constant volume flow control, both
total volume flow, is measured and temperature-com- parameters can be set to the same value.
pensated by two temperature-dependent resistors. The
volume flow is calculated by a microprocessor in the
controller. The characteristic curve of the effective pres-
sure is reflected in the controller so that the linearization The volume flow ranges can be adjusted on site using
can be carried out by the computer. As a result, the suitable programming aids (software, central control
linearized volume flow is presented as a value in physical unit). The controllers must be wired to the LON net-
units. work and the supply voltage must be present.For
The required volume flow is calculated by the room detailed information regarding changing of parameters,
. tem- consult the relevant Honeywell product documentation.
perature
. control circuit between the limit values Vmin and
Vmax. Special operating conditions (presence detectors
and window switches) can be taken into account. Adjustment Rules
The computed required volume flow is compared with .
Vmin values that fall below the minimum values given in
the actual value. The damper actuator is controlled in
the table should not be entered, as this could destabi-
accordance with the volume flow tolerances. The para-
lize volume flow control.
meters relevant to volume flow control are factory-pro- . .
grammed. After the customer has entered the remaining Vmin and Vmax values must not be confused when they
data, the controllers are ready for use. are entered.
Other parameters for volume flow control such as
actuator running times, unit nominal flows etc. must
not be changed.
3

l/s m3/h
Nominal
Vmin Vmax Vmin Vmax

size
Vmin1) to Vmin1) to
unit
to from Vnom unit
to from Vnom
1002) 10 75 30 95 36 270 108 342
125 15 120 45 150 54 432 162 540
160 25 200 75 250 90 720 270 900
200 40 325 120 405 144 1170 432 1458
250 60 490 185 615 216 1764 666 2214
315 105 820 310 1025 378 2952 1116 3690
400 170 1345 505 1680 612 4842 1818 6048

l/s m3/h
mm
Vmin unit1) to from to Vnom Vmin unit1) to from to Vnom
200 x 100 45 170 65 215 162 612 234 774
300 x 100 65 255 95 320 234 918 342 1152
400 x 100 85 340 130 425 306 1224 468 1530
500 x 100 105 430 160 535 378 1548 576 1926
600 x 100 130 520 195 650 468 1872 702 2340
200 x 200 85 330 125 415 306 1188 450 1494
300 x 200 125 495 185 620 450 1782 666 2232
400 x 200 165 660 250 825 594 2376 900 2970
500 x 200 205 830 310 1035 738 2988 1116 3726
600 x 200 250 1000 375 1250 900 3600 1350 4500
700 x 200 290 1160 435 1450 1044 4176 1566 5220
800 x 200 330 1320 495 1650 1188 4752 1782 5940
300 x 300 185 735 275 920 666 2646 990 3312
400 x 300 245 985 370 1230 882 3546 1332 4428
500 x 300 305 1230 460 1535 1098 4428 1656 5526
600 x 300 370 1480 555 1850 1332 5328 1998 6660
700 x 300 430 1720 645 2150 1548 6192 2322 7740
800 x 300 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820
900 x 300 555 2215 830 2770 1998 7974 2988 9972
1000 x 300 620 2480 930 3100 2232 8928 3348 11160
400 x 400 325 1305 490 1630 1170 4698 1764 5868
500 x 400 410 1630 610 2040 1476 5868 2196 7344
600 x 400 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820
700 x 400 570 2280 855 2850 2052 8208 3078 10260
800 x 400 650 2600 975 3250 2340 9360 3510 11700
900 x 400 735 2935 1100 3670 2646 10566 3960 13212
1000 x 400 820 3280 1230 4100 2952 11808 4428 14760
500 x 500 510 2030 760 2540 1836 7308 2736 9144
600 x 500 610 2440 915 3050 2196 8784 3294 10980
700 x 500 710 2840 1065 3550 2556 10224 3834 12780
800 x 500 810 3240 1215 4050 2916 11664 4374 14580
900 x 500 915 3655 1370 4570 3294 13158 4932 16452
1000 x 500 1020 4080 1530 5100 3672 14688 5508 18360
600 x 600 730 2920 1095 3650 2628 10512 3942 13140
700 x 600 850 3400 1275 4250 3060 12240 4590 15300
800 x 600 970 3880 1455 4850 3492 13968 5238 17460
900 x 600 1100 4400 1650 5500 3960 15840 5940 19800
1000 x 600 1220 4880 1830 6100 4392 17568 6588 21960
700 x 700 990 3960 1485 4950 3564 14256 5346 17820
800 x 700 1140 4560 1710 5700 4104 16416 6156 20520
900 x 700 1280 5120 1920 6400 4608 18432 6912 23040
1000 x 700 1420 5680 2130 7100 5112 20448 7668 25560
800 x 800 1300 5200 1950 6500 4680 18720 7020 23400
900 x 800 1460 5840 2190 7300 5256 21024 7884 26280
1000 x 800 1620 6480 2430 8100 5832 23328 8748 29160
900 x 900 1640 6560 2460 8200 5904 23616 8856 29520
1000 x 900 1820 7280 2730 9100 6552 26208 9828 32760
1000 x 1000 2020 8080 3030 10100 7272 29088 10908 36360
1) Vmin = 0 can also be realized 2) Nur TVR only
4

Volume flow V in %
as % of Vnom Order Code / Ordering Example
TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVS, TVRK TVJ/TVT
100 5 5
80 5 5
60 7 7
Vmin Vmax
40 7 8
20 9 14
10 20 >14
TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / HN5 / 0 - 50 - 240 l/s
<10 >20 >14
TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / HN5 / M - 50 - 240 l/s
TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / HN5 / S - 50 - 240 l/s
TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / HN5 / F - 100 l/s
Operating mode
E Individual
M Master
S Slave
F Constant value

E Vmin adjustment at required Vmin

M Vmax adjustment at required Vmax
Vmin adjustment at 0 %
S Vmax at Vmax, equivalent of
volume/flow ratio to master controller

F 2)
Vmax at 100 %
5
l/s m3/h
Nominal Order Code / Ordering Example
size Vmin unit Vnom Vmin unit Vnom
125 45 150 162 540
160 75 250 270 900 . .
Vwarm Vcold
200 120 405 432 1458
250 185 615 666 2214
TVM-R / 160 / HR6 / M - 50 - 240 l/s
. .
Vwarm = Vcold
TVM-R / 160 / HR6 / F - 400 l/s

Volume Flow Control Tolerances for TVM 1)
Volume flow V in % Operating mode
E Individual
100 5 7 M Master
80 5 10
F Constant value
60 5 12
40 7 15
20 9 -
10 20 -
<10 >20 -
1) Percentage figures based on actual Volume Flow Parameters

mode
E min adjustment at
min at 0 %
E required volume flow
M max at required warm
volume flow (cold)
F max at 100 %
6

1, 2 Supply voltage (24 V)
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23
W7751F2003 Connection for Wall Module T7770C

23 to 27
1 2 3 4 5 6 19 20 21 22
..............
Triac Output for External Valve,
Fan or Reheat Coils
3 24 V
5 Position signal OPEN
6 Position signal CLOSED
Lon-Bus
19, 20 E-Bus connection
Function of the other clamps and more technical details

see Honeywell documentation. Clamp 13 to 16 and
21 to 22 not in use.
LED Status Information Wiring

Wiring for the 24 VAC supply voltage must be performed
LED status Controller status by the customer. Safety transformers are to be used
Off No supply voltage (EN 60742).
Not in working order it is important to ensure that a common neutral or ground
On or not configured wire is used.
Slow The earth terminals (terminal 32) of each controller in the
Blinking Running, normal communication system must be connected to a high-value earth junc-
tion box. Lines should be as short as possible and wires
Fast Alarm available should be at least 1-2 mm wide.
Blinking or in manual test mode
7
A function test must be carried out with the other com-
Check wiring ponents connected and with communication functioning.
Activate supply voltage In many cases, incorrect wiring can give rise to system
Switch on control and air conditioning systems malfunctions. Therefore, a careful check should be car-
ried out to ensure that all connections are correct.
opened manually, the voltage will increase. This can be
confirmed with the aid of a connected laptop computer
As a rule, commissioning of control systems is or in the central control unit. After being adjusted man-
carried out by Honeywell technicians. ually, the actuator must be moved back to its original
For information on commissioning position.
(LON networks, communication software etc.)
consult the relevant Honeywell product Volume flow control is checked by comparing preset
documentation. values in the software with the actual values on the
display.

Honeywell volume flow controller W7751F2003, to the terminal unit type and size must be used. Since
every LON controller has its own LON ID number, binding
calibrated for TVR / 125 / E0 - 45 - 100 l/s
must first be performed (network replace) in order to
restore the function.
ment controller:
Unit type and size; for TVM units, indicate whether the
unit is a cold or warm duct controller
Operating mode
. .
Vmin and Vmax
Commissioning no. and delivery date of defects
8
1
Honeywell Actuator ML6174E2008
Subject
Contents
ML6174E2008
2
Page
Honeywell Actuator ML6174E2008
ML6174E2008 Actuator ML6174E2008
Application
1
Maintenance free damper actuator for VAV terminal units
with Honeywell volume flow controllers.
2
Functions
shaft. The unit is factory-wired to the volume flow con-
troller. The integral rotation angle limiter is set, and the
reached, the actuator stops automatically. No limit swit-
ches are required.
3
set).
4 For manual adjustment, the gears can be disengaged
via a button.
1 Shaft clamp
2 Rotation angle limiter
4 Connecting cable
2
Sauter RLE 150
Contents
Subject Page
Volume Flow Ranges, Single-Duct Units 6
Single-Duct Units 7
Dual Duct Units TVM 8
Room Temperature Control 10
Override Control 10
Supply/Extract Air Slave Control 11
Volume Flow Control of TVM Units 12
Design changes reserved All rights reserved Gebrder Trox GmbH (12/2001) Leaflet No. E016MB7
1
Sauter RLE 150
RLE 150 (Master) Area of Application

The electronic Sauter RLE 150 volume flow controller has
been designed for volume flow control in VAV systems. In
2 3 total the control for 1 room comprises 3 controllers.
4 5 Master Controller
. .
For the variable volume flow control with Vmin and Vmax
serves the master controller in connection with a suitable
room temperature controller or a DDC substation.
For this purpose the output signal of the controller is
1 switched onto the RLE 150 as command variable. The
volume flow control can be overrided
. with switches
(override control closed and Vmax).
RLE 150 (Slave) Slave Controller

The slave controller controls a volume flow as slave
control loop of another volume flow (master). The most
6 frequent application is the supply air/extract air slave
control. A desired volume flow differential between sup-
ply air and extract air is adjusted at the slave controller.
4 5
As second command variable the output signal of a room
pressure controller can be switched on. Also here, over-
ride controls are possible.
Room Pressure Controller

1
The control of extremely dense rooms is not satisfactorily
solved with the supply air / extract air slave control. With
1 Tube connections for transducer the room pressure controller the differential pressure as
to a reference room is measured and controlled. The
2 Vmin adjustment knob function is explained in detail in a separate Trox product
3 Vmax adjustment knob information.
4 Span adjustment knob
5 Connection terminals Static Measuring Principle
6 V adjustment knob The actual value of the volume flow is at both volume
flow controllers available as linear, electric standard
signal and can be switched to a DDC or used for indi-
cation. The voltage range for actual and set value is
0 to 10 VDC.
Type Range sure transducer. Therefore the RLE ... is suitable for the
control of extract air with contaminants and/or which is
VVS Unit Master Slave dust-loden. Terminal units with painted finish or made of
plastic should be considered in such situations.
TVZ, TVA, TVR,
RLE 150 F003 RLE 150 F013 IMPORTANT
TVRK, TVS, TVMcold
TVMwarm RLE 150 F002 ducer, to prove suitability for chemicals and concen-
trations concerned.
TVJ RLE 150 F002 RLE 150 F012
2
Sauter RLE 150
Volume Flow Measuring

Vnom
The volume flow is measured on the static differential
U
Vactual = Vnom . xi pressure principle. The effective pressure pw of the dif-
Volume flow
Adjustment
10 ferential pressure sensor in the terminal unit allows the
range
detection of a partial volume flow passing trough the
transducer. This partial volume flow which is proportional
to the total volume flow is measured, temperature com-
pensated and linearised with two temperature-dependent
resistors.
Vmin unit
0 factory calibration, so that 10 VDC always corresponds
0 Actual value signal Uxi 10 VDC to the unit nominal volume flow rate (Vnom). The signal is
processed by a microprocessor. The actual volume flow
is available as a linear voltage signalUxi.
The required volume flow is set by the room temperature .
controller
. via the control signal within the limits of Vmin
and Vmax.
0 to 10 VDC is the voltage range for signal transmission.
This facilitates an adjustment to the working ranges of
different room temperature controllers or DDC outsta-
Characteristic of Volume Flow Variable, Master tions. The set volume flow can be overridden using
switched controls. The RLE 150 determines the required
volume flow in accordance with the characteristic shown
Vnom and compares this with the actual value.
The damper actuator is controlled according to the devi-
U
Vset = Vnom . w1 Vmax ation. The Sauter volume flow controller RLE 150 can
10 only operate with the matched 3-point actuators.
Volume flow
Gravity Dependent
Vmin
of the RLE 150 affects the measured signal. The RLE 150
is normally calibrated for a vertical position of the mem-
0 brane, i.e. pressure tube connections above or below
0 Control signal Uw1 10 VDC horizontal plane. Other installation positions must be
specified on order.
Master Controller
The room temperature controller determines the set vol-
ume flow using the 0 to 10 VDC command variable within
the limits of Vmin and Vmax. The slope (incline) of the
characteristic remains always unchanged. The voltage is
Characteristic of Set Point Adjustment, Slave limited as to highest and lowest values. The limited volt-
age is connected to terminal w2.
VnomS Slave Controller

V V .
VS = M + VnomS Usually, the actual value signal of the supply air is given
VnomM 100
as command variable onto the controller. The set volume
Volume flow
flow is determined under consideration of the differential

slave
control. The set value can be further adjusted by the

second command variable input. This possibility is used
V for room pressure controls in cascade with volume flow
control.
0
VnomM
0 Volume flow master
3
Sauter RLE 150

1000 duct pressure, i.e. pressure fluctuations cause no changes
Pa Vmin Vmax to volume flow.
V V dead zone is allowed within which the damper does not
400
200
20 40 60 80 100
% of Vnom
Volume flow
Vmax Setting
V
Vmax set value = max . 100 % The Vmax value corresponds to the volume flow which is
Vnom
set with a 10 VDC control signal or Vmax override control.
Vmax figures relate to Vnom.
Uw2 upper limit = . 10 VDC
V
nom Control signals > Uw2 upper limit doesnt change the flow
rate.
Vmin Setting
Vmin .
Vmin set value = 100 % The Vmin value corresponds to the volume flow which is
Vnom
set with a 0 VDC control signal or Vmin override control.
Vmin may be set between 0 and 100 % of Vnom. The per-
Vmin centage figures relate to the Vnom volume flow setting.
Uw2 lower limit = . 10 VDC
Vnom If Vmin = 0 %, the damper will be moved to the CLOSED
position (leakage depends on the type of unit) with a
control signal of 0 VDC (alternatively 2 VDC).
Slave Control
VmaxM - VmaxS = VminM - VminS The RLE 150 only provides for ratio control, i. e. the
supply and extract air must be in the same ratio
VS VM The volume flow ratio is set using the V adjustment
V set value = V V
. 100
nomS nomM
shown opposite. Where the volume flows are the same
and the units of equal size, the setting will be 0 %. The
setting range is from 10 to + 10 %.
4
Sauter RLE 150
Adjustment Knobs RLE 150 (Master) Volume Flow Adjustment on Site

The set volume flow limit values can be adjusted using
the Vmin and Vmax adjustment knobs on the RLE 150.
1 2 Calculations are based on the formulae shown on
page 4.
5
3
4 Adjustment Rules
The adjustment knobs for Vmin and Vmax can within
the indicated limits be adjusted independently from
each other. An adjustment of less than 10 % cannot
be recommended, because of the reduced control
Adjustment Knobs RLE 150 (Slave) accuracy.
If the Vmin adjustment knob is set higher than Vmax,
then the maximum volume flow Vmax is constantly
6 controlled.
5 A constant volume flow (fixed value) is adjusted using
3 the Vmin adjustment knob; the Vmax adjustment knob
4 must be set at 100 %.
1 Vmin Adjustment Knob Calculating the Volume Flow Using

the Actual Value Signal Uxi
2 Vmax Adjustment Knob
3 Span Adjustment Knob The accuracy of the setting can be increased if the
actual value signal Uxi is also measured with the system
4 Zero Potentiometer switched on.
5 NZ Potentiometer (Neutral Zone) As a rule, the controller must have been connected to the
6 V Adjustment Knob supply voltage for at least 15 minutes before measure-
ments begin.
Disconnect all the wires from the terminal block,
except for terminals 1 and 2.
IMPORTANT Calculate the required value for Uxi at Vmax.
The Span Adjustment Knob must Insert a link between terminals 8 and 9.
not be adjusted. Move the Vmax adjustment knob until the voltage Uxi
corresponds to the calculated value (wait approx.
2 minutes after the adjustment, then read the voltage).
Remove the link between 8 and 9.
Calculate the voltage for Uxi at Vmin.
Proceed with the Vmin setting as for Vmax.
Formula for Vmax Formula for Vmin Replace the original wiring.
Slave controller: Connect control signal, measure and
V V calculate the set value Uxi and then adjust V.
Uxi = max . 10 V Uxi = min . 10 V
Vnom Vnom
Zero Point Adjustment
If necessary, the transducer can be adjusted to another
installation situation by customer using the zero-point
potentiometer. For measurement the supply voltage at
the RLE must be alive at least for 15 minutes. The re-
Formula for Volume Flow Difference adjustment of the zero point is necessary in any case, if
the Uxi signal is measured at removed measuring tubes
>1 VDC using the following procedure:
VS VM Remove measuring hoses (tubes).
Uxi = Uw2 + - . 10 V
VnomS VnomM Adjust zero-point potentiometer until the actual value
output signal Uxi is between 0.1 and 0.5 V.
Reconnect tubing.
5
Sauter RLE 150
Volume Flow Ranges TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVRK, TVS

l/s m3/h
Size Vmin unit 1) Vnom Vmin unit 1) Vnom
100 2) 15 95 54 342
125 20 150 72 540
160 35 250 126 900
200 50 405 180 1458
250 80 615 288 2214
315 130 1025 468 3690
400 215 1680 774 6048

BxH l/s m3/h
mm Vmin unit1) to Vnom Vmin unit1) to Vnom
200 x 100 25 215 90 774
300 x 100 40 320 144 1152
400 x 100 50 425 180 1530
500 x 100 65 535 234 1926
600 x 100 70 650 252 2340
200 x 200 50 415 180 1494
300 x 200 70 620 525 2232
400 x 200 100 825 360 2970
500 x 200 120 1035 432 3726
600 x 200 150 1250 540 4500
700 x 200 165 1450 594 5220
800 x 200 200 1650 720 5940
300 x 300 110 920 396 3312
400 x 300 150 1230 540 4428
500 x 300 185 1535 666 5526
600 x 300 240 1850 864 6660
700 x 300 260 2150 936 7740
800 x 300 315 2450 1134 8820
900 x 300 330 2770 1188 9972
1000 x 300 390 3100 1404 11160
400 x 400 205 1630 738 5868
500 x 400 255 2040 918 7344
600 x 400 315 2450 1134 8820
700 x 400 355 2850 1278 10260
800 x 400 420 3250 1512 11700
900 x 400 455 3670 1638 13212
1000 x 400 520 4100 1872 14760
500 x 500 310 2540 1116 9144
600 x 500 370 3050 1332 10980
700 x 500 430 3550 1548 12780
800 x 500 495 4050 1782 14580
900 x 500 555 4570 1998 16452
1000 x 500 620 5100 2232 18360
600 x 600 455 3650 1638 13140
700 x 600 530 4250 1908 15300
800 x 600 605 4850 2178 17460
900 x 600 680 5500 2448 19800
1000 x 600 755 6100 2718 21960
700 x 700 605 4950 2178 17820
800 x 700 690 5700 2484 20520
900 x 700 780 6400 2808 23040
1000 x 700 865 7100 3114 25560
800 x 800 805 6500 2898 23400
900 x 800 905 7300 3258 26280
1000 x 800 1005 8100 3618 29160
900 x 900 1030 8200 3708 29520
1000 x 900 1145 9100 4122 32760
1000 x 1000 1285 10100 4626 36360
6
Sauter RLE 150
Volume Flow Control Tolerances1) Single-Duct Units

Volume flow V in %
in % of Vnom Order Code / Examples
TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVRK, TVS TVJ/TVT
100 5 5
80 5 5
60 7 7
Vmin Vmax
40 7 8
20 9 14
15 20 >14 TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / CB1 / M - 50 - 240 l/s
<15 >20 >14
TVA-R / 160 / 00 / CC1 / S - 50 - 240 l/s
TVR / 160 / 00 / CB1 / F - 200 l/s
TVJ-R / 400 x 107 / 00 / CE1 / M - 200 - 400 l/s
TVJ-R / 400 x 107 / 00 / CF1 / S - 200 - 400 l/s
Operating mode
E Individual
M Master
S Slave
F Fixed

Operating
Factory Setting
mode
E Vmin adjustment knob set at required Vmin

M Vmax adjustment knob set at required Vmax
V adjustment knob set at volume flow

S
difference to master

F constant volume flow
Vmax adjustment knob set at 100 %
7
Sauter RLE 150
Volume Flow Range TVM Dual Duct Units TVM

l/s m3/h
Size Vmin-unit Vnom Vmin-unit Vnom
125 45 150 162 540
160 75 250 270 900 . .
Vwarm Vcold
200 120 405 432 1458
250 185 615 666 2214
TVM-R / 160 / CD3 / E - 120 - 200 l/s
. .
Vwarm = Vcold
TVM-R / 160 / CD3 / F - 150 l/s

Volume flow V in % Operating Mode
in % of Vnom TVMcold TVM total E Individual
100 5 7 M Master
80 5 10 F Fixed
60 5 12
40 7 15
30 8 17
20 9 -
15 20 -
<15 >20 -
Mode
Cold Duct Controller Warm Duct Controller
Vmin adjustment Vmin adjustment

E knob set at 0 % knob set at required
volume flow Vwarm
M Vmax adjustment
F knob set at required Vmax adjustment
volume flow (Vcold) knob set at 100 %
8
Sauter RLE 150

Master and Slave Controller
1, 7, 11, 13, 15 N : Ground, neutral
2 L1 : Supply voltage 24 VAC
3, 4, 5 : Connection actuator (24 VAC)
Actuator S2 6 : Input override control CLOSED
(Shut 12 : Output actual volume flow Uxi
off)
RLE 150, Master (0 to 10 VDC)
Master
8 : Input override control Vmax
9 L1 : Auxiliary voltage for override
control
10 : Input set volume flow Uw1
(0 to 10 VDC)
14 : Output set volume flow Uw2
(0 to 10 VDC)
Actuator S2
(Shut Slave
RLE 150, Slave off) 8 : Input set value
(Room pressure) w3, 0 to 10 VDC
9 N : Ground, neutral
10 : Input set value (Master) w2,
0 to 10 VDC
IMPORTANT Wiring
The examples illustrated show the most common Actuator and volume flow controller are factory wired.
arrangements for volume flow control. The Sauter The 24 VAC voltage supply must be wired up by the
specifications must be observed in the overall control customer. Safety transformers must be used (EN 60742).
system design, selection of the other control com- If several volume flow controllers are connected to one
ponents and wire sizing. Details of other circuits are 24 V network, it is important to ensure that a common
available from Sauter. neutral or ground wire is used and that this is not con-
9
Sauter RLE 150

A suitable room temperature controller or a DDC sub-
24 VAC RT Controller station with 0 - 10 VDC output is connected at least twin-
wired according to wiring diagram (terminal 1 and 10).
At common voltage supply with 24 VAC it has to be con-
sidered that terminal 1 at RLE 150 is also ground for the
command signal.
Parallel Control
be operated in parallel by one room temperature control-
.
ler. If.the terminal units are the same size and the Vmin
and Vmax adjustment knobs are set at the same values,
RLE 150, Master
Operating Mode E, M
RLE 150, Parallel Controller, (Master)

Operating Mode E, M
Override Control Override Control

The variable volume flow control can be overridden using
24 VAC RT Controller zero-potential switch contacts supplied by the customer.
This override control can be used with any controller,
either separately or centrally, for individual rooms or parts
of the system. Several volume flow controllers can also
be actuated using one switch, if a joint ground wire is
available and the control signal is connected in parallel.
S2
S1
Switch
Function
S1 S2
Open Open Control Mode
.
Closed Open Vmax
RLE 150, Master
Open Closed Closed
Operating Mode E, M
Closed Closed Closed
10
Sauter RLE 150

With parallel control of the units, an undesirable differ-
24 VAC RT Controller ence between supply and extract air can occur if the
air, as the command signal for the slave volume flow
controller (master terminal L1 on slave terminal 10).
Supply / Extract Air Slave Control (Using Uw2)

Alternatively to supply/extract air slave control the limited
set value signal Uw2 (master controller terminal 14 on
slave controller terminal 10) can command the slave con-
troller. The slave controller then controls to the set value
of the master controller independent of whether this
value is actually reached at the master controller.
RLE 150, Master Any override controls (window switch) must be con-
Operating Mode M nected to both controllers.
Uxi
Uw2
RLE 150, Slave

Operating Mode S

Switching Vmin, Vmax, Closed Switching Vmin, Vmax, Closed
By means of simple switches as shown in the wiring
diagram, it is possible to change over to set values for
the volume flow. A command signal is not required.
Switch
S2 Function
S1 S2
Open Open Control Mode
S1 .
Closed Open Vmax
Open Closed Closed
Closed Closed Closed
RLE 150, Master

Operating Mode E, M
11
Sauter RLE 150
with Dual Duct Unit TVM The two controllers fitted to the dual duct unit TVM (cold,
24 VAC
circuit diagram opposite (including the 24 VAC cross-
RT Controller connection).
from 0 to the required Vwarm warm as a maximum set
point. The warm duct controller (Vtotal is measured) is
therefore set as a constant value controller and does not
require a command signal.
TVM literature.
Cold Controller RLE 150, (Master)
Supply / Extract Air Slave Control

for Dual Duct Unit TVM
The actual value output signal Uxi of the warm duct con-
troller is proportional to the total volume flow Vtotal. It can
therefore be used as the command signal for a slave
Warm Controller RLE 150, (Master) controller.
Extract Air Controller RLE 150, (Slave)

Operating Mode S
12
Sauter RLE 150

Check wiring
Connect supply voltage measuring the signals Uxi and Uw2. If Uxi and Uw2 are
Connect air supply systems identical, the required volume flow is reached. If the volt-
ages deviate, the control procedure has not yet been
finished.
Measure the set- and actual value (xi, w2)
If the commissioning procedure is to include verification
of the set volume flows Vmin and Vmax, these must be set
as described below. The actual value signal Uxi is meas-
ured in each operating situation and the volume flow is
Record actual value signal xi then calculated using the formulae given on page 4.
for override control Vmin
Record actual value signal xi faults. Therefore a careful check should be carried out to
for override control Vmax
ensure that all connections are correct. All wires except
terminals 1 and 2 should be disconnected before the fol-
lowing checks are made.
Fault Finding Check If the actuator drive is disengaged and the damper
openedmanually, the voltage Uxi must increase.
Connect the actuator (terminal 3, 4 and 5), link terminals
no
Wiring correct? Correct wiring error 6 and 7: The actuator must close.
yes
Change link terminal 6 to terminal 8 and 9: The actuator
must open again.
no
Supply voltage within Check Transformer Without link: The RLE 150 controls Vmin. If Uw2 = Uxi, cal-
the Sauter specifications? etc.
culate the volume flow and compare it with label.
yes Link terminals 8 and 9: Repeat measurement for Vmax, as
no
Actual value signal Uxi described above.

Controller faulty
consistent? Remove link and apply the command signal w1. Calcu-
yes late the set volume flow and compare it with the actual
volume flow.
no
Actuator rotation correct?

Actuator opens and closes? Damper obstructed? Apply override controls and test the desired functions in
sequence.
yes
no

sufficient?
yes Measuring tubing to
the transmitter
no
Volume flow Vmax? demaged?
yes
no
Check room
Set volume flow signal? temperature controller
yes
no
Check window
Override controls?
Order Example Spare Controller Replacement Controller

set for the terminal unit and size must be used. Uncali-
Sauter RLE 150 F003
brated controllers can only be used as a temporary solu-
preset for TVR / 125 / M - 140 - 300 m3/h tion.
ment controller:
Operating mode
Vmin and Vmax
13
Sauter RLE, Room Pressure Control
Contents
Subject Page
Single-Duct Units 6
Design changes reserved All rights reserved Gebrder Trox GmbH (12/2001) Leaflet No. E016MM3
1
RLE 150 F100, Room Pressure Controller Area of Application

The pneumatic Sauter RLE 150 room pressure controller
3 4 has been designed for the high or low pressure control of
dense rooms. The room pressure is controlled using the
2 master-and-slave system (cascade-controlled) by a
Sauter RLE 150 F012/F013 flow volume controller, which
controls the flow volume control unit in supply air or
5 extract air. In total the control for 1 room comprises
3 controllers.

1 The control of extremely dense rooms is not satisfactorily
solved with the supply/extract air slave control, as meas-
uring and control tolerances as well as the unknown
density degree of the room may lead to undesirably high
RLE 150 (Auxiliary Controller) room pressures or to room pressures with wrong signs.
With the room pressure controller the differential pressure
as to a reference room is measured and controlled. The
6 set volume flow of the slave controller is within a limited
range in addition to the master controller influenced by
2
the room pressure controller.
5
Master Controller
limitation serves the master controller in connection with
a suitable room temperature controller.
1
Slave Controller
The slave controller controls a volume flow as cascade
1 Tube connections for transducer control loop of another volume flow (master). As a
2 Span p adjustment knob second command variable the output signal of the room
3 Xs adjustment knob pressure controller is switched on (activated).
4 Xp adjustment knob Master and slave controller are explained in detail in a
separate Trox product information (E16MB7).
5 Connection terminals
The actual values of room pressure and volume flows are
6 V adjustment knob available as linear electric standard signals and can be
used for indication. The voltage range for actual and set
value is 0 to 10 VDC.

Type Range The volume flow is measured using a membrane pressu-
re transducer. Therefore the RLE ... is suitable for the
Auxiliary Room Pressure control of extract air with contaminants and/or which is
VVS Unit Controller Controller dust-loden. Terminal units with painted finish or made of
TVZ, TVA, TVR RLE 150 F013

IMPORTANT
RLE 150 F100 In critical cases, a material test should be carried out
TVJ RLE 150 F012 trations concerned.
2

+20 The room pressure1) is measured on the static differential
(+50) pressure principle. One measuring point each for static
pressure is provided in the room to be controlled and in
Room pressure
the reference room. If several rooms are switched one

difference
behind the other in pressure cascade, a neutral reference

0 pressure is recommended, i.e. corridor, which must be
free from wind influence and other pressure fluctuations.
These pressures (room pressure differentials) are meas-
ured by a membrane pressure transducer. The actual
room pressure value is available as voltage signal Uxi The
-20 set room pressure is adjusted or predetermined by the
(-50) 0 5 10 VDC command variable as 0 to 10 VDC signal. The controller
Actual value signal Uxi compares the required room pressure with the actual
value. Corresponding to the control deviation the influ-
ence onto the slave controller is changed. The room
pressure control shows PI behaviour.
Characteristic of the Actual Value Signal Volume Flow Controller

Auxiliary Controller The volume flow is measured on the static differential
pressure principle. For further explanations please refer
to the separate Trox product information E16MB7,
nom page 3.
Uxi
Auxiliary Controller
actual = nom . Usually the actual value signal of the supply air is is given
onto the controller as command variable and the set
Adjustment
10
Volume flow
volume flow is determined under consideration of the dif-

range
ferential control. The second command variable input

(room pressure controller) results in a further adjustment
of the set value. The controller determines the required
volume flow according to the characteristics as shown
min unit and compares this with the actual value. The damper
actuator is controlled according to the control deviation.
0
0 Actual value signal Uxi 10 VDC The optimum control parameters are adjusted and sealed
in the factory. To the RLE controllers belong 3-point actu-
ators.
Gravity Dependent
Characteristic of Set Point Adjustment Because of the weight of the membrane the positioning
of the RLE affects the measured signal. The RLE is nor-
Auxiliary Controller mally calibrated for a vertical position of the membrane,
nomS plane. Other installation positions must be specified on
order.
S = ( M
+
Uw2-5
). nomS
nomM 50
Volume flow
0
0 Volume Flow Master nomM
1) For simplification the room pressure differential is referred to as
room pressure in this leaflet.
3
Control Behaviour after Alteration of Disturbance Room Pressure Control

As the room pressure controller works with PI character-
istic (proportional-integral) the required room pressure is
Door closed
Door open
theoretically always obtained. Deviations are only given

by the measuring tolerance of the room pressure trans-
Room pressure
ducer (component in RLE). It is, however, a prerequisite

difference
that the room has the density required, in order to

achieve the required room pressure from the volume flow
differential between between supply air and extract air.
The room pressure height, which results from alterations
of disturbances (door closed) as well as the setting
(stabilization) time required depends i. a. on the duct
pressures in the supply and extract air system, room
0 density and air change (rate) (volume flow/contents).
Time
Volume Flow Control

duct pressure, i.e. pressure fluctuations cause no
changes to volume flow.
Pressure Independent Control Characteristic To prevent the volume flow control becoming unstable, a
Pa min max
800

differential
600 mum pressure differential, inlet flow conditions etc.) are

Pressure

400
Room Pressure Adjustment
200
The required room pressure is adjusted at the Xs adjust-
ment knob. The adjustment range reaches from 20 to
20 40 60 80 100 +20 Pa and/or 50 to +50 Pa. If the room pressure is
% of nom variable, e.g. changeover high/low pressure, the adjust-
Volume flow ment knob must be set to left-hand stop (20 Pa / 50
Pa). If necessary, the lower pressure value can be limited.
Adjustment of Volume Flow Differential

The V adjustment knob of the slave controller must be
set to 10 % in order to obtain an unobjectionable func-
Formula for Room Pressure Control tioning of room pressure control. When ordering, the
appertaining master unit must be indicated as well. The
p master unit must be of equal size. Please, consult Trox in
p set value = . 100 % case of deviations.
pnom
4
Adjustment Knobs 150 F100 Volume Flow Adjustment on Site

(Room Pressure Controller) A subsequent adjustment of the room pressure set value
can be made at the Xs-adjustment knob of the RLE 150.
Calculation is made according to formula on page 4.
Zero Point Adjustment
If necessary, the transducer can be adjusted to another
installation situation by customer using the zero-point
potentiometer. For measurement the supply voltage at
the RLE must be alive at least for 15 minutes. The re-
adjustment of the zero point is necessary in any case, if
the Uxi signal is measured at removed measuring tubes
Adjustment Knobs RLE 150 (Auxiliary Controller) >1 VDC (outside 4.9 to 5.1 VDC at room pressure con-
troller) using the following procedure:
Remove measuring tubes
6 Adjust zero point potentiometer until the actual value
7 output signal Uxi is between 0.1 and 0.3 V at the slave
controller and/or 4.9 and 5.1 V at the room pressure
1 5 controller.
Reconnect tubing
1 Span p Adjustment Knob

2 Xs Adjustment Knob
3 Xp Adjustment Knob
4 Tn Potentiometer (reset time)
5 Zero Potentiometer (Zero point)
6 V Adjustment Knob
7 NZ Potentiometer (hysteresis)
IMPORTANT
The Span Adjustment Knob must not be adjusted
on both controllers.
5
Volume Flow Ranges TVZ, TVA, TVR Single Duct Units

Vnom
Size Order Code / Examples
l/s m3/h The available options are given in the current price list.
100 1) 95 342
125 150 540
160 250 900 TVA-R / 160 / 00 / CJ1 / A - - 15 Pa
200 405 1458
250 615 2214
315 1025 3690 TVR / 16 / 00 / CJ1 / Z - + 15 Pa
400 1680 6048
Volume Flow Ranges TVJ/TVT TVJ / 400 x 107 / 00 / CL1 / A - + 15 Pa

BxH Vnom
mm l/s m3/h
200 x 100 215 774 Installation place
300 x 100 425 1530
400 x 100 650 2340 Z Supply Air
500 x 100 825 2970 A Extract Air
600 x 100 1250 4500
200 x 200 1650 5940
300 x 200 1850 6660
400 x 200 2450 8820 When ordering, the appertaining master unit must be
500 x 200 3100 11160 indicated as well. The master unit must be of equal size.
600 x 200 2450 8820 Please, consult Trox in case of deviations.
700 x 200 3250 11700
800 x 200 4100 14760
300 x 300 320 1152
400 x 300 535 1926
500 x 300 415 1494 Room Pressure Parameters
600 x 300 620 2232
700 x 300 1035 3726 Factory Setting
800 x 300 1450 5220
900 x 300 920 3312
1000 x 300 1230 4428 Room pressure adjustment knob
set at required room pressure
400 x 400 1535 5526
500 x 400 2150 7740
600 x 400 2770 9972
700 x 400 1630 5868
800 x 400 2040 7344
900 x 400 2850 10260 Volume Flow Parameters
1000 x 400 3670 13212
500 x 500 2540 9144 Factory Setting
600 x 500 3050 10980
700 x 500 3550 12780
800 x 500 4050 14580 V Adjustment knob set at 10 %
900 x 500 4570 16452
1000 x 500 5100 18360
600 x 600 3650 13140
700 x 600 4250 15300
800 x 600 4850 17460
900 x 600 5500 19800 Volume Flow Control Tolerances TVM 2)
1000 x 600 6100 21960
700 x 700 4950 17820 Volume flow V in %
800 x 700 5700 20520 in % of Vnom TVZ, TVA, TVR TVJ
900 x 700 6400 23040
1000 x 700 7100 25560 100 5 5
800 x 800 6500 23400 80 5 5
900 x 800 7300 26280 60 7 7
1000 x 800 8100 29160 40 7 8
900 x 900 8200 29520 20 9 14
1000 x 900 9100 32760 15 20 >14
1000 x 1000 10100 36360 <15 >20 >14
1) Only TVR 2) Percentages figures based on actual
6

1, 4, 6, 8, 10 N : Ground, neutral
2 L1 : Supply voltage 24 VAC
3 : Output actual volume Uxi
(0 to 10 VDC)
RLE 150 Room pressure controller
5 : Output set volume Uw3
(0 to 10 VDC)
7 : Input set room pressure Uxs
(0 to 10 VDC)
9 : Output set volume Uw Inv
(0 to 10 VDC)
1, 7, 9, 11, 13 N: Ground, neutral
Actuator S2 2 L1 : Supply voltage 24 VAC
(Shut off)
3, 4, 5 : Connection actuator (24 VAC)
RLE 150 Auxiliary controller 6 : Input override control CLOSED
8 : Input set value 2 Uw3
(0 to 10 VDC)
10 : Input set value 1 Uw2
IMPORTANT (0 to 10 VDC)
The examples illustrated show the most common 12 : Output actual volume flow Uxi
arrangements for volume flow control. The Sauter (0 to 10 VDC)
specifications must be observed in the overall control
system design, selection of the other control com-
ponents and wire sizing. Details of other circuits are Wiring
available from Sauter.
Actuator and volume flow controller are factory wired.
The 24 VAC voltage supply must be wired up by the
customer. Safety transformers must be used (EN 60742).
If several volume flow controllers are connected to one
24 V network, it is important to ensure that a common
neutral or ground wire is used and that this is not con-
Tube Connections
Tube dimensions : di = 6 mm
max. lengths : 10 m (plus and minus
in total)1)

The RLP 150 is tube-connected according to the sketch
shown. The measuring points in the room and reference
room must be free from any turbulences (no influence
due to room flow, no dynamic share pd ).
The room pressure is always connected to the plus input,
also at low pressure control.
Reference Room
room
Note:
If room groups with different pressure stages are
arranged one behind the other, all transducers shall
operate with a common reference pressure, e.g.
atmospheric pressure.
1) Recommendation
7

The slave controller will have two command variables.
24 VAC RT Controller The first determines the actual value in most cases of
the supply air. The second command variable comes
from the room pressure controller.
Single-wiring is possible, if already by the supply voltage
a common ground is given. Twin-wiring is to be preferred
because of the electromagnetic compatibility.
Room Pressure Control

The room pressure controller should be assembled close
to the room and/or reference room in order to keep the
tube lengths of the measurement lines short.
Override Control
RLE 150, Master Override Controls are possible. For further information
Operating Mode M please refer to the product information for Sauter
RLE 150 (leaflet No. E16MB7).
RLE 150, Slave
1)
RLE 150, Room pressure controller
Operating Mode A
1) For room pressure control with slave for supply air (mode Z)
link terminals 9 and 8.
8

For commissioning it is best to first disconnect (remove)
Check wiring
Connect supply voltage
the command variable of the room pressure controller
Connect air supply systems (slave controller: terminal 8). With the doors open, master
and slave controller are set in operation according to
Trox product information (RLE 150, E16MB7). Then
reconnect command variable, shut the doors and check
Check Master and Slave Controller room pressure (smoke checks).
If the blade of the extract air unit is closed manually
(disengagement of actuator and adjustment of blade
using a tong to avoid injuries), the room pressure and
Check Room Pressure Controller correspondingly Uxi must increase.
The set value of the room pressure is reached, when the
room pressure determined from the Uxi measured is in
conformity with the set value. If this is not the case, the
room leakage is too high. The set value has to be re-
Fault Finding Check duced. If the room proves to be non-air-tight, the room
pressure control cannot function. The room is then to be
taken into operation with the supply air/extract air slave
no
Wiring correct? Correct wiring error

control.
yes
no
Supply voltage within Check Transformer

the Sauter specifications? etc.
yes
no
Actual value signal Uxi Connect room

consistent? pressure at plus
yes
no
Room pressure set value

Actuator open or closed?
to high? Room leaky?

Room pressure controller Sauter RLE 150 F 100
preset at +15 Pa
solution.
ment controller: Room pressure, Vmin and Vmax.
Auxiliary controller Sauter RLE 150 F 013
preset at TVA 160
9
Sauter RLP 10
Contents
Subject Page
Volume Flow Ranges Single-Duct Units 6
Order Code, Examples Single-Duct Units 7
Dual-Duct Unit TVM 8

Tube Connections 9
Room Temperatur Control 10
Supply Air/Extract Air Slave Control
with Dual Duct Unit TVM 12
Design changes reserved All rights reserved Gebrder Trox GmbH (12/2001) Leaflet No. E016MH0
1
Sauter RLP 10
RLP 10 Area of Application

The RLP 10 pneumatic volume flow controller from
to Trox-differential Sauter is designed for VAV terminal units. The controller
pressure sensor comprises a membrane pressure transducer.
For variable volume flow control a suitable pneumatic
room temperature controller must be used.
The output signal from this controller serves as com-
mand variable for the RLP 10.
Pneumatic switches are used for override control. The
ard linear, pneumatic signal. This signal can be used for
example to control a slave unit for extract air.
The RLP 10 has adjustment knobs for setting Vmin and
Vmax. All controller adjustments are set by Trox and the
unit is supplied with settings sealed. No adjustment is
necessary by the customer. As soon as the operating
pressure and theroom temperature controller have been
connected, the terminal unit is ready for use. Any volume
flow changes which may be necessary to the RLP 10 can
easily be carried out by the customer.
RLP 10 controller
For parallel operation, several RLP 10 controllers can be
Tube connections connected up to one room thermostat, if the air handling
Vmin adjustment knob capacity of the room temperature controller is not ex-
Vmax adjustment knob ceeded. Supply/extract air slave control is possible.

The volume flow is measured using a membrane pressu-
re transducer. Therefore the RLP 10 is suitable for the
Type Range dust-loden. Terminal units with painted finish or made of
plastic should be considered in such situations. For the
Actuator Controller control of extract air contaminated with chemicals, only a
special design should be used which blows through the
high and low pressure measurement tubes.
Normally OPEN (NO) RLP 10 F905
IMPORTANT
Normally CLOSED (NZ) RLP 10 F001 ducer, to prove suitability for chemicals and concen-
trations concerned.
2
Sauter RLP 10

The volume flow is measured by the static differential
Vnom pressure principle. The differential pressure sensor in the
(100 %) terminal unit measures the effective pressure pe. This
VI = p3 . Vnom causes a membrane in the pressure transducer to
Volume flow
deflect. The movement is detected and converted into a

linear pneumatic signal 0 to 1.0 bar for actual volume
flow.
The measurement range is set during factory calibration
V(20 %)
to suit the unit size, so that 1.0 bar always corresponds
to the unit nominal volume flow rate (Vnom, except slaves
0.2 Actual value 1.0 bar and TVM warm duct controllers).
signal p3
The actual volume flow can be shown by a gauge with
very low air capacity or using a split signal relay be used
to command extract air.
controller with the command signal within the limits of
Characteristic of Volume Flow Variable Vmin and Vmax . The RLP 10 determines the required vol-
ume flow in accordance with the characteristic shown and
Vnom compares this with the actual value. The damper actu-
ator is controlled according to the deviation. The volume
V
max flow control is integral action. The controller RLP 10 is
Volume flow
VS1) = p6.Vnom used with a specific Trox actuator. The controller is

adjusted to the correct action of the damper (normally
open/close) during factory calibration.
Vmin
V(20%) Gravity Dependency
0.2 Because of the weight of the membrane the position of
Control signal p6 1.0 bar
the RLP 10 affects the measurement signal. The RLP 10
1) Limited by Vmin and Vmax
is normally calibrated for a vertical position of the mem-
brane, i.e. pressure tube connections above or below
horizontal plane. Other installation positions must be
specified on order.
3
Sauter RLP 10

pressure, which means that pressure fluctuations do not
cause permanent volume flow changes.
The hysteresis of the controller, coupled with measuring

tolerances, produces a volume flow deviation shown
opposite.
If the conditions mentioned in the leaflet are not met,
(e.g. lowest differential pressure, supply air conditions)
larger deviations can be expected.
Volume Flow Command Signal

The control characteristic of the thermostat signal is lim-
Volume flow % of nom ited by Vmin at the bottom end and Vmax at the top end.
Thus control signals below the pressure corresponding to
Vmin (p6 lower limit) and above the Vmax(p6 upper limit) do not
lead to any volume flow changes.

Vmax Setting
max
max set value = . 100 % The Vmax value corresponds to the volume flow which is
nom set with a command signal greater p6 upper limit (max.
1 bar) or Vmax override control. The setting range is from
0 to 100 %. The percentage based on Vnom.
p6 upper limit max
=
nom
Vmin Setting
The Vmin value corresponds to the volume flow which is
set with a command signal lower p6 lower limit or Vmin over-
min set value min . 100 % ride control. The setting range is from 20 to 100 %. The
=
nom percentage based on Vnom. Vmin can be set to 0. To do
this, the adjustment knob must be turned anti-clockwise
beyond the 20 % stop by approximately one quarter turn
min until an audible click is heard.
p6 lower limit =
nom
Slave Control
The RLP 10 only provides for ratio control, i.e. the
maxM maxS supply and extract air must be in the same ratio
= under all operating conditions.
minM minS
The volume flow ratio is set during factory calibration
controller internally.
4
Sauter RLP 10
Adjustment Knobs Volume Flow Adjustment on Site

using the Vmin and Vmax adjustment knobs on the
RLP 10. Calculations are based on the formulae shown
on page 4.
Adjustment Rules
The adjustment knobs for Vmin and Vmax can be set
within the given limits independently. Vmin values lower
20 % should not be set as the volume flow deviations
increase.
A constant volume flow is set at the Vmin adjustment
knob. The Vmax adjustment knob has to be at 100 %.
If the Vmin adjustment knob is set higher than Vmax, the
maximum volume flow is constantly controlled.
Formula for Vmin

min ( 2
pw-min =
( C
Using the Effective Pressure
The accuracy of the setting can be increased if the effec-
tive pressure signal Dp e is also measured with the
system switched on.
Remove the tube from connection 6 (command signal)
so that the controller runs at Vmin. Do not seal the con-
necting nipple.

Formula for Vmax Calculate the effective pressure for Vmin.
Tune Vmin adjustment knob until the effective pressure
corresponds to the calculated value (after adjustment,
max ( 2 wait until the controller has settled and the actuator
pw-max =
( C
stopped).
Close connection 6 with a cap or sealed tube. The
controller runs at Vmax.
Calculate the effective pressure for Vmax.
Proceed with the Vmax setting as for Vmin.
Replace original tube connections.
The C values for the above calculations are given in the

VARYCONTROL Product Information under the heading
Commissioning.
5
Sauter RLP 10

l/s m3/h
Size Vmin-unit 1)
to Vnom Vmin-unit 1)
to Vnom
100 2) 20 95 72 342
125 30 150 108 540
160 50 250 180 900
200 80 405 288 1458
250 125 615 450 2214
315 205 1025 738 3690
400 3) 340 1680 1224 6048

BxH l/s m3/h
mm Vmin-unit1) Vnom Vmin-unit1) Vnom
200 x 100 45 215 162 774
300 x 100 65 320 234 1152
400 x 100 85 425 306 1530
500 x 100 105 535 378 1926
600 x 100 130 650 468 2340
200 x 200 85 415 306 1494
300 x 200 125 620 450 2232
400 x 200 165 825 594 2970
500 x 200 205 1035 738 3726
600 x 200 250 1250 900 4500
700 x 200 290 1450 1044 5220
800 x 200 330 1650 1188 5940
300 x 300 185 920 666 3312
400 x 300 245 1230 882 4428
500 x 300 305 1535 1098 5526
600 x 300 370 1850 1332 6660
700 x 300 430 2150 1548 7740
800 x 300 490 2450 1764 8820
900 x 300 555 2770 1998 9972
1000 x 300 620 3100 2232 11160
400 x 400 325 1630 1170 5868
500 x 400 410 2040 1476 7344
600 x 400 490 2450 1764 8820
700 x 400 570 2850 2052 10260
800 x 400 650 3250 2340 11700
900 x 400 735 3670 2646 13212
1000 x 400 820 4100 2952 14760
500 x 500 510 2540 1836 9144
600 x 500 610 3050 2196 10980
700 x 500 710 3550 2556 12780
800 x 500 810 4050 2916 14580
900 x 500 915 4570 3294 16452
1000 x 500 1020 5100 3672 18360
600 x 600 730 3650 2628 13140
700 x 600 850 4250 3060 15300
800 x 600 970 4850 3492 17460
900 x 600 1100 5500 3960 19800
1000 x 600 1220 6100 4392 21960
700 x 700 990 4950 3564 17820
800 x 700 1140 5700 4104 20520
900 x 700 1280 6400 4608 23040
1000 x 700 1420 7100 5112 25560
800 x 800 1300 6500 4680 23400
900 x 800 1460 7300 5256 26280
1000 x 800 1620 8100 5832 29160
900 x 900 1640 8200 5904 29520
1000 x 900 1820 9100 6552 32760
1000 x 1000 2020 10100 7272 36360
1) Vmin = 0 is also possible 2) Only TVR 3) Not for TVRK
6
Sauter RLP 10

Volume flow V in %
TVZ, TVA, TVR TVJ/TVT
100 5 5
80 5 5
60 5 6
Vmin Vmax
40 7 8
20 10 11
<20 >10 >11 TVR / 160 / 00 / PA1 / E - 70 - 240 l/s

TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / PD1 / M - 70 - 240 l/s
TVA-R / 160 / 00 / PA1 / S - 70 - 240 l/s
Operation Mode
E Individual
M Master
S Slave
F Fixed
Volume Flow Parameter

Operating
Factory Setting
Mode

Vmin adjustment knob turned anti-

clockwise for 0 % setting
S Vmax adjustment knob set at 100 %
Volume flow ratio to master is adjusted
internally

Vmax adjustment knob set at 100 %
7
Sauter RLP 10
Volume Flow Ranges TVM Dual Duct Unit TVM
l/s m3/h
1) 1)
Size min- Ref- min- Ref-
Vnom
Warm
Vnom
Warm
unit unit
125 45 150 190 162 540 684

. .
160 75 250 325 270 900 1170 Vwarm Vcold
200 120 405 490 432 1458 1764
250 185 615 685 666 2214 2466 TVM-R / 160 / P14 / E - 100 - 200 l/s
. .
Vwarm = Vcold
TVM-R / 160 / P14 / F - 200 l/s

Operating Mode
Volume flow V in %
in % of Vnom TVMcold TVM total E Individual
M Master
100 5 7
F Fixed
80 5 10
60 5 12
40 7 15
30 8 17
20 10 -
<20 >10 -
1) Ref is only a reference value for calculating actual.
In the formula Ref is setted as nom.
2) Percentage figures based on actual. Operating Factory Setting
Mode
Cold Controller Warm Controller
Vmin adjustment Vmin adjustment

E knob turned knob set at
anti-clockwise for required Vwarm
M 0 % setting
F
Vmax adjustment Vmax adjustment
knob set at required knob set at 100 %
Vcold
8
Sauter RLP 10
Tube Connections Nomenclature

+ High pressure take off from differential pressure
sensor
- Low pressure take off from differential pressure
1 6 31) 2
sensor
+ 1 Operating pressure input (1.3 bar, 0.1 bar)
2 Actuator output (0.2 to 1.0 bar)
3 Actual volume flow output (0.2 to 1.0 bar)
6 Set volume flow input (0.2 to 1.0 bar)
IMPORTANT
The examples illustrated show the most common

arrangements for volume flow control. The Sauter Tube Connections
system design, selection of the other control com- The differential pressure sensor of the terminal unit and
ponents and tube sizing. the actuator are connected by tube to the volume flow
controller in the factory. The operating pressure and the
thermostat must be connected by the customer. Ensure
that the operating compressed air meets the require-
ments in the Sauter documentation. It has to be consid-
ered that the operating pressure air must meet the re-
quirements for conditioned instrument compressed air
(free from oil, dust and water).
PN 21, DW
Control Sequences
The adjustment signal of the room temperature controller
Vnom can be divided into sequences if a water valve is to be
V controlled in addition to the volume flow. Adjustment to
Volume flow
max
the pressure range of the thermostat is made by a
sequence or sequence reversing relay.
PN21, DA (direct action)
Vmin Control signal 0.2 to 1.0 bar gives rise in volume flow.
V (20 %) PN61, DA (direct action)
0.2 1.0 bar Control Signal 0.6 to 1.0 bar gives rise in volume flow.
Control signal p6
Fail Safe Direction of Actuator

If the operating pressure fails or is disconnected, the
actuator moves to a defined end position. This can be
PN 61, DW open or closed damper position. Selection of the fail safe
direction allows system-specific safety requirements.
Vnom NC (normally closed): Damper closed with no pressure

V
Volume flow
max NO (normally open) : Damper open with no pressure
Vmin
V (20 %)
0.2 0.6 1.0 bar
Control signal RT 2)
1) Operation mode E, F and S: closed

2) The room temperature controller must be connected
on sequenzing relay
9
Sauter RLP 10
Room Temperatur Control Room Thermostat

(PN 21, DW)
The RLP 10 volume flow controller should be connected
to room thermostats according to the connection dia-
Operating Room temper-
pressure ature controller,
gramsshown.
supply 1.3 bar DW The volume flow controllers release compressed air via
the input connection. Thus the room thermostat can be
connected with one line only. The room thermostat must
have sufficient air handling capacity for the volume flow
controller. If several volume flow controllers are connec-
ted to one room thermostat, the sum of the air capacities
of all volume flow controllers must be taken into account.
If this exceeds the maximum air handling capacity of the
RLP 10
room thermostat, split signal relays must be used. If the
Operating mode E, M
line from the thermostat to the volume flow controller
contains a split signal relay, a non venting thermostat can
be used.
Parallel Control
RLP 10, Parallel controller
Operating mode E, M Several volume flow controllers (supply or extract air) can
be operated in parallel by one room temperature control-
ler. If the terminal units are the same size and the Vmin
Raumtemperature Control with Heating Sequence If several controllers are connected to one room tem-
(PN 61, DW) perature controller, the sum of the air capacities of all
volume flow controllers has to be considered.
If this amount exceeds the maximum air capacity of the
pressure ature controller, room temperature controller, split signal relays have to be
supply 1.3 bar DW
used.
2) Heating valve
1)
0.2 to 0.6 bar, NO External Operating Pressure Connections
The volume flow controllers RLP 10 can be connected
directly to the operating pressure supply as they have an
internal restrictor. If the signal from the room thermostat
is divided into several sequences and a sequencing relay
RLP 10 connected, a supply pressure must be supplied to the
Operating mode E, M
thermostat. The correct sizing of the restrictor must take
into account the heating valve actuator. Noise from the
room thermostat will occur if the restrictor is too small.
1) Sequence relay contained in Trox scope of supply
2) Restrictor by customer
10
Sauter RLP 10
Room Temperature Control with Shut Off Mode Shut Off Control
(PN 21, DW, NZ)
the customers pneumatic switches.
pressure ature controller, The override control for full shut off can take place on all
supply 1.3 bar DW or separate terminat units. A break in the pressure line to
the controlter or actuator leads to closure of the damper
when fail safe direction of action is normally closed. With
S1
this override control, and unit type TVZ/TVA/TVR/TVM,
full shut off leakage air volume flows to DIN 1946 part 4
are achieved. With TVM units, note that the override con-
S2 trol must be switched to both controllers.
RLP 10 Operating mode E, M S1, S2 closed: Room temperature control mode
S1 or S2 open: Override control
Actuator Safety Function Damper Open

If, for safety reasons, ventilation must be guaranteed for
certain building sections, actuators with fail safe direction
S1 System shut off switch
normally open (open under no pressure) must be used. In
S2 Window switch
the event of failure of the compressed air supply, the
damper always opens.
Supply air/extract air slave control is possible using the
Operating Room temper- actual value of the supply air as a control signal for the
supply 1.3 bar DW control of extract air, if RLP 10 is used for supply air and
a second volume flow controller for the extract air. Only
ratio control can be achieved, i.e. supply and extract air
must remain in the same ratio.
297690 1)
The separating relay in the control line is factory-fitted a
short distance from the supply air controller. It must not
be moved.
RLP 10, Supply Air

Operating mode M
RLP 10, Extract Air

Operating mode S
1) Split relay on request contained in Trox scope of supply
11
Sauter RLP 10
Supply Air / Extract Air Slave Control Volume Flow Control of TVM Units
with Dual Duct Unit TVM The two controllers fitted to the dual duct unit TVM (cold,
warm) must be tubed by the customer as shown in the
Operating Room temper- circuit diagram opposite (including the operating pres-
pressure ature controller, sure supply cross-connection).
supply 1.3 bar DW
from 0 to the required Vwarm as a maximum set point. The
warm duct controller (Vtotal is measured) is therefore set
as a constant value controller and does not require a
1 6
command signal.
RLP 10, Cold For a more detailed functional description, refer to the
TVM literature.
297690 2 1)
1 3
TVM Supply / Extract Air Slave Control
with Dual Duct TVM
1 6 3 The actual value output signal p3 of the warm duct con-
troller is proportional to the total volume flow Vtotal. It can
RLP 10, Warm therefore be used as the command signal for a slave
Operating mode M
controller.
1 6
RLP 10, Slave

Operating mode S
12
Sauter RLP 10

A rapid function test for commissioning can be carried
Test tubing Connect out with the system running and the operating pressure
supply compressed air present. Remove the tube from the connection to the
Connect air conditioning system operating pressure supply. If compressed air escapes
from the line, this shows that the controller is supplied
with compressed air. After replacing the tube, the actua-
tor must return to approximately the same position it held
before the test. If commissioning involves proving the
Check operating pressure limit volume flows Vmin and Vmax these must be set as
described below.
For each operating situation, the effective pressure (pw)
is measured at the Trox differential pressure sensor and
Override control Vmin the volume flow calculated:
Record actual value signal pw
Override control Vmax
Record actual value signal pw Vactual = C . pw
Fault Finding Check In many cases, incorrect tube connections or insufficient

operating pressure are the cause of the faults.
Therefore for a detailed test on each volume flow control-
no
Operating pressure due ler, first remove the signal from the room thermostat and
Check pressure
to Sauter requirements? then measure the operating pressure.
yes Remove the high pressure and low pressure lines on the
volume flow controller and connect a manometer. The
Damper blocked?
no
Actuator opening actuator must open and the effective pressure (pe) must
Fail safe direction
and closing? rise.
OK? Controller faulty
Reconnect the high pressure line, the actuator must now
yes
close and the effective pressure must fall.
no
Volume flow Vmin ? Duct pressure Connect the low pressure line. The controller must con-
sufficient? trol to Vmin. Measure effective pressure, calculate volume
flow and compare with designed value.
yes Close off connection 6 for room thermostat. The control-
Measurement
ler must control to Vmax. Repeat measurement for Vmax
no
tubing to Sensor
Volume flow Vmax ? as described above.
damaged?
Measure control signal p6 and connect. Calculate set
yes volume flow and compare with actual volume flow.
Activate override controls and check operation.
no

control? thermostat
yes
no
Check window
Override controls? switch, relay etc.

To replace faulty controllers, only controllers set for the
Sauter RLP 10 terminal unit type and size must be used. Unadjusted
preset for TVZ 125, 80 ... 140 l/s, PN21, DW, NZ
controllers are only acceptable as a temporary solution.
When ordering spare controllers, state Vmin and Vmax.
13
Sauter RLP 100
Contents
Subject Page
Tube Connections 8
1
Sauter RLP 100
RLP 100 Areas of Application

to Trox-differential The RLP 100 pneumatic volume flow controller from
pressure sensor Sauter is designed for VAV terminal units. The controller
comprises a membrane pressure transducer.
For variable volume flow control a suitable pneumatic
room temperature controller must be used. The output
signal from this controller serves as command variable
for the RLP 100.
Pneumatic switches are used for override control. The
ard linear, pneumatic signal. This signal can be used for
example to control a slave unit for extract air.
The RLP 100 has adjustment knobs for setting Vmin and
Vmax. All controller adjustments are set by Trox and the
unit is supplied with settings sealed. No adjustment is
necessary by the customer. As soon as the operating
pressure and the room temperature controller have been
connected, the terminal unit is ready for use. Any volume
flow changes which may be necessary to the RLP 100
can easily be carried out by the customer.
For parallel operation, several RLP 100 controllers can be
connected up to one room thermostat, if the air handling
capacity of the room temperature controller is not ex-
ceeded. Supply/extract air slave control is possible.

RLP 100 controller The volume flow is measured using a membrane pressu-
Tube connections re transducer. Therefore the RLP 100 is suitable for the
Vmin adjustment knob control of extract air with contaminants and/or which is
E adjustment knob dust-loden. Terminal units with painted finish or made of
plastic should be considered in such situations. For the
Vmax adjustment knob control of extract air contaminated with chemicals, only a
special design should be used which blows through the
high and low pressure measurement tubes.
IMPORTANT
Type Range In critical cases, a material test should be carried out
Actuator Controller ducer, to prove suitability for chemicals and concen-
trations concerned.
Normally OPEN (NO) RLP 100 F002
Normally CLOSED (NZ) RLP 100 F001
2
Sauter RLP 100

The volume flow is measured by the static differential
Vnom pressure principle. The differential pressure sensor in the
(100 %)
terminal unit measures the effective pressure pe. This
Volume flow
causes a membrane in the pressure transducer to

VI = pM . Vnom
deflect. The movement is detected and converted into a
linear pneumatic signal 0 to 1.0 bar for actual volume
flow.
The measurement range is set during factory calibration
V (20 %)
to suit the unit size, so that 1.0 bar always corresponds
to the unit nominal volume flow rate (Vnom, except slaves
0.2 Actual value 1.0 bar and TVM warm duct controllers).
signal pM The actual volume flow can beshown by a gauge with
very low air capacity or using a split signal relay be used
to command extract air.
controller with the command signal within the limits of
Characteristic of Volume Flow Variable Vmin and Vmax. The RLP 100 determines the required
volume flow in accordance with the characteristic shown
Vnom and compares this with the actual value. The damper
actuator is controlled according to the deviation. The
Vmax volume flow control is integral action. The controller
Volume flow
VS = p6.Vnom
1)
RLP 100 is used with a specific Trox actuator. The con-
troller is adjusted to the correct action of the damper
(normally open/close) during factory calibration.
Vmin
V (20 %) Gravity Dependency
Because of the weight of the membrane the position
0.2 Control signal p6 1.0 bar of the RLP 100 affects the measurement signal. The
RLP 100 is normally calibrated for a vertical position of
1) Limited by Vmin and Vmax
the membrane, i.e. pressure tube connections above or
below horizontal plane. Other installation positions must
be specified on order.
3
Sauter RLP 100

pressure, which means that pressure fluctuations do not
cause permanent volume flow changes.
The hysteresis of the controller, coupled with measuring

tolerances, produces a volume flow deviation shown
opposite.
If the conditions mentioned in the leaflet are not met,
(e.g. lowest differential pressure, supply air conditions)
larger deviations can be expected.
Volume Flow Command Signal

The control characteristic of the thermostat signal is lim-
Volume flow % of nom ited by Vmin at the bottom end and Vmax at the top end.
Thus control signals below the pressure corresponding to
Vmin (p6 lower limit) and above the Vmax (p6 upper limit) do not
lead to any volume flow changes.

Vmax Setting
max
max set value = . 100 % The Vmax value corresponds to the volume flow which
nom is set with a command signal greater p6-upper limit (max.
1 bar) or Vmax override control. The setting range is from
0 to 100 %. The percentage based on Vnom.
p6 upper limit max
=
nom
Vmin Setting
The Vmin value corresponds to the volume flow which is
set with a command signal lower p6 lower limit or Vmin over-
min set value min ride control.
= . 100 %
nom The setting range is from 20 to 100 %. The percentage
based on Vnom. Vmin can be set to 0. To do this, the
adjustment knob must be turned anti-clockwise beyond
p6 lower limit min the 20 % stop by approximately one quarter turn until an
= audible click is heard.
nom
Slave Control
maxM maxS The RLP 100 only provides for ratio control, i.e. the
= supply and extract air must be in the same ratio
minM minS
The volume flow ratio is set during factory calibration
controller internally.
4
Sauter RLP 100
Adjustment Knobs Volume Flow Adjustment on Site

using the Vmin and Vmax adjustment knobs on the
E RLP 100. Calculations are based on the formulae shown
on page 4.
Vmin
Adjustment Rules
The adjustment knobs for Vmin and Vmax can be set
within the given limits independently. Vmin values lower
Vmax 20 % should not be set as the volume flow deviations
increase.
A constant volume flow is set at the Vmin adjustment
knob. The Vmax adjustment knob has to be at 100%.
If the Vmin adjustment knob is set higher than Vmax ,
the maximum volume flow is constantly controlled.

Using the Effective Pressure

Formula for Vmin The accuracy of the setting can be increased if the effec-
tive pressure signal Dp e is also measured with the
system switched on.
min 2
( Remove the tube from connection 6 (command signal)
pw-min =
( C so that the controller runs at Vmin. Do not seal the con-
necting nipple.
Calculate the effective pressure for Vmin.
Tune Vmin adjustment knob until the effective pressure
wait until the controller has settled and the actuator
stopped).
Formula for Vmax Close connection 6 with a cap or sealed tube. The
2
max (
pw-max =
( C
Proceed with the Vmax setting as for Vmin.
The C values for the above calculations are given in the

Commissioning.
5
Sauter RLP 100

l/s m3/h
VN VH VN VH
Size
Vmin 1) to Vmin to Vmin 1) to Vmin to

unit Vnom unit Vnom unit Vnom unit Vnom
1002) 10 50 15 75 36 180 54 270
125 15 75 22 110 54 270 79 396
160 25 125 40 190 90 450 144 684
200 40 200 60 305 144 720 216 1098
250 60 300 95 480 216 1080 342 1728
315 105 525 155 780 378 1890 558 2808
4003) 170 850 260 1300 612 3060 936 4680

BxH l/s m3/h
200 x 100 45 215 162 774
300 x 100 65 320 234 1152
400 x 100 85 425 306 1530
500 x 100 105 535 378 1926
600 x 100 130 650 468 2340
200 x 200 85 415 306 1494
300 x 200 125 620 450 2232
400 x 200 165 825 594 2970
500 x 200 205 1035 738 3726
600 x 200 250 1250 900 4500
700 x 200 290 1450 1044 5220
800 x 200 330 1650 1188 5940
300 x 300 185 920 666 3312
400 x 300 245 1230 882 4428
500 x 300 305 1535 1098 5526
600 x 300 370 1850 1332 6660
700 x 300 430 2150 1548 7740
800 x 300 490 2450 1764 8820
900 x 300 555 2770 1998 9972
1000 x 300 620 3100 2232 11160
400 x 400 325 1630 1170 5868
500 x 400 410 2040 1476 7344
600 x 400 490 2450 1764 8820
700 x 400 570 2850 2052 10260
800 x 400 650 3250 2340 11700
900 x 400 735 3670 2646 13212
1000 x 400 820 4100 2952 14760
500 x 500 510 2540 1836 9144
600 x 500 610 3050 2196 10980
700 x 500 710 3550 2556 12780
800 x 500 810 4050 2916 14580
900 x 500 915 4570 3294 16452
1000 x 500 1020 5100 3672 18360
600 x 600 730 3650 2628 13140
700 x 600 850 4250 3060 15300
800 x 600 970 4850 3492 17460
900 x 600 1100 5500 3960 19800
1000 x 600 1220 6100 4392 21960
700 x 700 990 4950 3564 17820
800 x 700 1140 5700 4104 20520
900 x 700 1280 6400 4608 23040
1000 x 700 1420 7100 5112 25560
800 x 800 1300 6500 4680 23400
900 x 800 1460 7300 5256 26280
1000 x 800 1620 8100 5832 29160
900 x 900 1640 8200 5904 29520
1000 x 900 1820 9100 6552 32760
1000 x 1000 2020 10100 7272 36360
1) Vmin = 0 is also possible 2) Only TVR 3) Not for TVRK
6
Sauter RLP 100

Volume flow V in %
80 5 5
60 5 6
Vmin Vmax
40 7 8
20 10 11
<20 >10 >11 TVR / 160 / 00 / PN1 / EN - 50 - 110 l/s
1) Only TVR
2) Not for TVRK
TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / PR1 / MN - 50 - 110 l/s
TVA-R / 160 / 00 / PN1 / SN - 50 - 110 l/s
Volume Flow
Operating Mode
Range
E Individual
N Low
M Master
(standard)
S Slave
H High
F Fixed
Volume Flow Parameter

Operating
Factory Setting
Mode

Vmin adjustment knob turned anti-

clockwise for 0 % setting
S Vmax adjustment knob set at 100 %
Volume flow ratio to master is adjusted
internally

Vmax adjustment knob at 100 %
7
Sauter RLP 100
Tube Connections Nomenclature

sensor
sensor
1 Operating pressure (1.3 bar, 0.1 bar)
2 Output for actuator (0.2 to 1.0 bar)
8 7 2 1 6 6 Input pressure for set volume flow (0.2 to 1.0 bar)
M Output pressure for actual volume flow
(0.2 to 1.0 bar)
IMPORTANT Tube Connections

The examples illustrated show the most common The differential pressure sensor of the terminal unit and
arrangements for volume flow control. The Sauter the actuator are connected by tube to the volume flow
specifications must be observed in the overall control controller in the factory. The operating pressure and the
system design, selection of the other control com- thermostat must be connected by the customer. Ensure
ponents and tube sizing. that the operating compressed air meets the require-
ments in the Sauter documentation. It has to be consid-
ered that the operating pressure air must meet the re-
quirements for conditioned instrument compressed air
(free from oil, dust and water).
Control Sequences
The adjustment signal of the room temperature controller
PN 21, DW can be divided into sequences if a water valve is to be
controlled in addition to the volume flow. Adjustment to
the pressure range of the thermostat is made by a
Vnom sequencing relay.
V PN21, DW (direct action)
Volume flow
max
Command signal 0.2 to 1.0 bar gives rise in volume flow.
PN61, DW (direct action)
Vmin Command signal 0.6 to 1.0 bar gives rise in volume flow.
V (20%)
Fail Safe Direction of Actuator
0.2 Control signal p6 1.0 bar If the operating pressure fails or is disconnected, the
actuator moves to a defined end position. This can be
open or shut-off damper position. Selection of the fail
safe direction allows system-specific safety require-
ments.
PN 61, DW NZ (normally closed): Damper closed with no pressure
NO (normal open) : Damper open with no pressure

Vnom
V
max
Volume flow
Vmin
V (20%)
0.2 0.6 1.0 bar

Control signal RT 2)
1) Operation mode E, F and S: closed

2) The room temperature controller must be connected
on sequenzing relay
8
Sauter RLP 100
Room Temperature Control Room Thermostat

(PN 21, DW)
to room thermostats according to the connection dia-
Operating Room temper- grams shown. The volume flow controllers release com-
supply 1.3 bar DW pressed air via the input connection. Thus the room ther-
mostat can be connected with one line only. The room
thermostat must have sufficient handling air capacity for
the volume flow controller. If several volume flow control-
lers are connected to one room thermostat, the sum of
the air capacities of all volume flow controllers must be
taken into account. If this exceeds the maximum hand-
ling air capacity of the room thermostat, split signal
RLP 100 relays must be used. If the line from the thermostat to the
Operating mode E, M volume flow controller contains a split signal relay, a non
venting thermostat can be used.
Parallel Control
RLP 100, Parallel Controller be operated in parallel by one room temperature control-
Operating mode E, M
ler. If the terminal units are the same size and the Vmin
If several controllers are connected to aone room tempe-
rature controller, the sum of the air capacities of all volu-
Room Temperature Control with Heating Sequence me flow controllers has to be considered. If this amount
(PN 61, DW) exceeds the maximum air capacity handling of the room
temperature controller, split signal relays have to be
Operating Room temper- used.
supply 1.3 bar DW
External Operating Pressure Connections

2) Heating valve
0.2 bis 0.6 bar, NO The volume flow controllers RLP 100 can be connected
297510 1) directly to the operating pressure supply as they have an
internal restrictor. If the signal from the room thermostat
is divided into several sequences and a sequencing relay
connected, a supply pressure must be supplied to the
thermostat. The correct sizing of the restrictor must take
into account the heating valve actuator. Noise from the
RLP 100 room thermostat will occur if the restrictor is too small.
Operating mode E, M
1) Sequence relay contained in Trox scope of supply

2) Restrictor by customer
9
Sauter RLP 100
Room Temperature Control with Shut Off Mode Shut Off Control
(PN 21, DW, NZ)
the customer's pneumatic switches. The override control
Operating Room temper- for full shut off can take place on all or separate terminat
supply 1.3 bar DW units. A break in the pressure line to the controlter or
actuator leads to closure of the damper when fail safe
direction of action is normally closed. With this override
S1 control, and unit type TVZ/ TVA/TVR full shut off leakage
air volume flows to DIN 1946 part 4 are achieved. With
TVM units, note that the override control must be
S2 switched to both controllers.
RLP 100 S1, S2 closed: Room temperature control mode

Operating mode E, M
S1 or S2 open: Override control
Actuator Safety Function Damper Open

If, for safety reasons, ventilation must be guaranteed for
S1 System shut off switch certain building sections, actuators with fail safe direction
S2 Window switch normally open (open under no pressure) must be used. In
the event of failure of the compressed air supply, the
damper always opens.
Supply air/extract air slave control is possible using the
Operating Room temper- actual value of the supply air as a control signal for the
supply 1.3 bar DW control of extract air, if RLP 100 is used for supply air and
a second volume flow controller for the extract air. Only
ratio control can be achieved, i.e. supply and extract air
must remain in the same ratio.
297690 1) The separating relay in the control line is factory-fitted a
short distance from the supply air controller. It must not
be moved. If the extract air volume flow is reduced to 0,
an RLP100 must be used. The volume flow ratio may be
less than or greater than 100 % and is factory-set using
RLP 100, Supply Air an adjustment screw in the controller. The Vmax adjust-
Operating mode M ment knob is set to 100 %, the Vmin adjustment knob
to 0 %.
RLP 100 , Extract Air

Operating mode S
10
Sauter RLP 100

A rapid function test for commissioning can be carried
Test tubing Connect out with the system running and the operating pressure
supply compressed air present. Remove the tube from the connection to the
Connect air conditioning system operating pressure supply. If compressed air escapes
from the line, this shows that the controller is supplied
with compressed air. After replacing the tube, the actua-
tor must return to approximately the same position it held
before the test. If commissioning involves proving the
Check operating pressure limit volume flows Vmin and Vmax hese must be set as
described below.
For each operating situation, the effective pressure (pw)
is measured at the Trox differential pressure sensor and
Override control Vmin the volume flow calculated:
Record actual value signal pw
Override control Vmax
Record actual value signal pw Vactual = C . pw
Fault Finding Check In many cases, incorrect tube connections or insufficient

operating pressure are the cause of the faults. Therefore
for a detailed test on each volume flow controller, first
no
Operating pressure due remove the signal from the room thermostat and then
Check pressure
to Sauter requirements? measure the operating pressure.
Remove the high pressure and low pressure lines on the
yes
volume flow controller and connect a manometer. The
no
Actuator opening Damper blocked? Fail actuator must open and the effective pressure (pe) must
safe direction OK? rise.
and closing? Controller faulty
Reconnect the high pressure line, the actuator must now
yes close and the effective pressure must fall.
no
Connect the low pressure line. The controller must con-

Volume flow Vmin ? Duct pressure
trol to Vmin. Measure effective pressure, calculate volume
sufficient?
flow and compare with designed value.
yes Close off connection 6 for room thermostat. The control-
Measurement
ler must control to Vmax. Repeat measurement for Vmax
no
tubing to Sensor
Volume flow Vmax ? as described above.
damaged?
Measure control signal p6 and connect.
yes Calculate set volume flow and compare with actual
volume flow.
no

control? thermostat Activate override controls and check operation.
yes
no
Check window

To replace faulty controllers, only controllers set for the
Sauter RLP 100 terminal unit type and size must be used. Unadjusted
preset for TVZ 125, 30 ... 60 l/s, VH-Range, controllers are only acceptable as a temporary solution.
PN21, DW, NZ When ordering spare controllers, state Vmin and Vmax.
11
Sauter RLP 100, Room Pressure Control
Contents
Subject Page
Room Pressure Adjustment on Site 5
Tube Connections 8
Room Temperature and Room Pressure Control 9
1
RLP 100 F901/F915 Area of Application

The pneumatic Sauter RLP 100 room pressure controller
has been designed for the high or low pressure control of
dense rooms. The room pressure is controlled using the
master-and-slave system (cascade-controlled) by a
Sauter RLP 100 F003/F004 flow volume controller, which
controls the flow volume control unit in supply air or
extract air. In total the control for 1 room comprises
3 controllers:

The control of extremely dense rooms is not satisfactorily
solved with the supply/extract air slave control, as meas-
uring and control tolerances as well as the unknown
density degree of the room may lead to undesirably high
room pressures or to room pressures with wrong signs.
With the room pressure controller the differential pressure
as to a reference room is measured and controlled. The
RLP 100 F003/F004 set volume flow of the slave controller is within a limited
range in addition to the master controller influenced by
the room pressure controller.

Volume Flow Controller 1

limitation serves the volume flow controller 1 in connec-
tion with a suitable room temperature controller.

Volume Flow Controller 2
Volume flow controller 2 operates in parallel to volume
flow controller 1 and also receives the signal from the
room temperature controller. As a second command vari-
able the output signal of the room pressure controller is
switched on (activated).
Controller RLP 100... Vmin adjustment knob The volume flow controllers RLP100 F001/F002 are
xp adjustment knob, % V adjustment knob explained in detail in a separate Trox product information
p adjustment knob Tn adjustment knob (E16NH1).
E adjustment knob Tube connections The actual values of room pressure and volume flows are
available as linear pneumatic standard signals and can
be used for indication.

Type Range sure transducer. Therefore the RLP ... is suitable for the
Characteristic Controller dust-loden. Terminal units with painted finish or made of
20 to +20 Pa RLP 100 F901 IMPORTANT
50 to +50 Pa RLP 100 F915
Volume Flow Controller ducer, to prove suitability for chemicals and concen-
Actuator Normally Open (NO) RLP 100 F004 trations concerned.
Actuator Normally Closed (NZ) RLP 100 F003
2
Characteristic Actual Value Description of Function

+ The room pressure1) is measured on the static differential
pressure principle. One measuring point each for static
pressure is provided in the room to be controlled and in
Room pressure
the reference room. If several rooms are switched one

difference
behind the other in pressure cascade, a neutral reference

0 pressure is recommended, i.e. corridor, which must be
free from wind influence and other pressure fluctuations.
These pressures (room pressure differentials) are meas-
ured by a membrane pressure transducer. The actual
room pressure value is available as pneumatic signal PM.
The set room pressure is adjusted or predetermined by
- an external command variable. The controller compares
0 0.6 1.0 bar the required room pressure with the actual value. Cor-
Actual value signal PM responding to the control deviation the influence onto the
volume flow controller 2 is changed. The room pressure
control shows PI behaviour.
Volume Flow Controller

Characteristic Actual Value The volume flow is measured on the static differential
Slave Controller pressure principle. For further explanations please refer
to the separate Trox product information E16NH1.
The set volume flow is predetermined by the room tem-
Vnom perature controller and limited to Vmin and Vmax. The
second command variable (for room pressure controller)
Vactual = PM . Vnom results in a further adjustment of the set value. The con-
Volume flow
troller determines the required volume flow according to

the characteristics as shown and compares this with the
actual value.
The damper actuator is controlled according to the con-
trol deviation. The volume flow control shows I-behav-
iour. The volume flow controllers are used together with a
Vmin unit certain type of Trox actuators. Adaptation to the fail safe
0 direction of the adjustment blade (NZ/NO) inside the con-
troller is made in the factory.
0 Actual value signal PM 1.0 bar
Gravity Dependency
Characteristic of Set-Point Adjustment i.e. pressure tube connections above or below horizontal
Volume Flow Controller 2 plane. Other installation positions must be specified on
order.
Vnom
P - 0.6 .
V2 = V1 + 8 Vnom
4
Volume flow
controller 2
V
0
0 Volume flow controller 1 Vnom
1) For simplification the room pressure differential is referred to as
room pressure in this leaflet.
3
Control Behaviour after Alteration of Disturbance Room Pressure Control

As the room pressure controller works with PI character-
istic (proportional-integral) the required room pressure is
Door closed
Door open
theoretically always obtained. Deviations are only given

by the measuring tolerance of the room pressure trans-
Room pressure
ducer (component in RLP 100...). It is, however, a prere-

difference
quisite that the room has the density required, in order to

achieve the required room pressure from the volume flow
differential between between supply air and extract air.
The room pressure height, which results from alterations
of disturbances (door closed) as well as the setting (sta-
bilization) time required depends i.a. on the duct pres-
sures in the supply and extract air system, room density
0 and air change (rate) (volume flow / contents).
Time
Volume Flow Control

duct pressure, i.e. pressure fluctuations cause no
changes to volume flow.
Pressure Independent Control Characteristic To prevent the volume flow control becoming unstable, a
1000 move.
Pa Vmin Vmax
800 This dead zone and the accuracy of site measurements
lead to volume flow deviation V shown opposite.
V V
difference
Pressure

200 Room Pressure Adjustment

The required room pressure is adjusted at the Dp adjust-
20 40 60 80 100 ment knob. The adjustment range reaches from 20 to
% of Vnom +20 Pa and/or 50 to +50Pa.
Volume flow If the room pressure is variable, e. g. changeover high/low
pressure, the adjustment knob must be set to 20 Pa
(and/or 50 Pa). If necessary, the lower pressure value
can be limited.
Adjustment Volume Flow Controller 2

Formula for Volume Flow Adjustment
The V-adjustment knob at volume flow controller 2 must
be set to 0 % in order to obtain an unobjectionable func-
max tioning of room pressure control. The adjustments of Vmin
max set value = . 100 % and Vmax must be in conformity with the values of con-
nom troller 1.
When ordering, the appertaining master unit must be
indicated as well. The master unit must be of equal size.
min set value min Please, consult Trox in case of deviations.
= . 100 %
nom
4
Adjustment Knobs RLP 100 Room Pressure Adjustment on Site

A subsequent adjustment of the room pressure set value
can be made at the p adjustment knob of the RLP 100.
Non Air Tight Room

Tn Should at commissioning it turn out that the required
room pressure cannot be achieved, because the room
xp has not the projected density, a supply air/extract air
slave control has to be adjusted.
For this purpose the room pressure controller is put out
of force leaving connection 8 of the slave controller open.
p
The V adjustment knob is set to 10 %. Thus the extract
air follows the supply air in a ratio 1 : 1.
Adjustment Rules
The adjustment knobs for Vmin and Vmax can within the
Adjustment Knobs RLP 100 indicated limits be adjusted independently from each
Volume Flow Controller other. An adjustment of less than 20 % cannot be
recommended, because of the reduced control ac-
curacy.
If the Vmin adjustment knob is set higher than Vmax,
then the maximum volume flow Vmax is constantly con-
trolled.
A constant volume flow (fixed value) is adjusted using
the Vmin adjustment knob; the Vmax adjustment knob
must be set at 100 %.

lf subsequent changes to the volume flow limit values are
required, the setting knobs can be reset to the new
values using the rules above. The accuracy can be in-
xp adjustment knob, % Vmin adjustment knob creased if the effective pressures of the differential pres-
sure sensor can be measured and the following proce-
p adjustment knob V adjustment knob dure carried out with the system switched on:
Tn adjustment knob Remove the tube from connection 6 (control signal) so
E adjustment knob that the controller runs at Vmin. Do not seal the con-
necting nipple.
Calculate the effective pressure for Vmin.
Set Vmin adjustment knob until the effective pressure
wait until the controller has settled and the actuator
Formula for Vmin stopped).
Close connection 6 with a cap or sealed hose. The
2
min (
pw-min =
( C
Reset the Vmax adjustment knob as described for Vmin.
The C values for the above calcolations are given in the

Commissioning.

Formula for Vmax
max ( 2
pw-max =
( C
5

l/s m3/h
VN VH VN VH
Size
Vmin-1) to Vmin- to Vmin-1) to Vmin- to

unit Vnom unit Vnom unit Vnom unit Vnom
1002) 10 50 15 75 36 180 54 270
125 15 75 22 110 54 270 79 396
160 25 125 40 190 90 450 144 684
200 40 200 60 305 144 720 216 1098
250 60 300 95 480 216 1080 342 1728
315 105 525 155 780 378 1890 558 2808
4003) 170 850 260 1300 612 3060 936 4680

BxH l/s m3/h
200 x 100 45 215 162 774
300 x 100 65 320 234 1152
400 x 100 85 425 306 1530
500 x 100 105 535 378 1926
600 x 100 130 650 468 2340
200 x 200 85 415 306 1494
300 x 200 125 620 450 2232
400 x 200 165 825 594 2970
500 x 200 205 1035 738 3726
600 x 200 250 1250 900 4500
700 x 200 290 1450 1044 5220
800 x 200 330 1650 1188 5940
300 x 300 185 920 666 3312
400 x 300 245 1230 882 4428
500 x 300 305 1535 1098 5526
600 x 300 370 1850 1332 6660
700 x 300 430 2150 1548 7740
800 x 300 490 2450 1764 8820
900 x 300 555 2770 1998 9972
1000 x 300 620 3100 2232 11160
400 x 400 325 1630 1170 5868
500 x 400 410 2040 1476 7344
600 x 400 490 2450 1764 8820
700 x 400 570 2850 2052 10260
800 x 400 650 3250 2340 11700
900 x 400 735 3670 2646 13212
1000 x 400 820 4100 2952 14760
500 x 500 510 2540 1836 9144
600 x 500 610 3050 2196 10980
700 x 500 710 3550 2556 12780
800 x 500 810 4050 2916 14580
900 x 500 915 4570 3294 16452
1000 x 500 1020 5100 3672 18360
600 x 600 730 3650 2628 13140
700 x 600 850 4250 3060 15300
800 x 600 970 4850 3492 17460
900 x 600 1100 5500 3960 19800
1000 x 600 1220 6100 4392 21960
700 x 700 990 4950 3564 17820
800 x 700 1140 5700 4104 20520
900 x 700 1280 6400 4608 23040
1000 x 700 1420 7100 5112 25560
800 x 800 1300 6500 4680 23400
900 x 800 1460 7300 5256 26280
1000 x 800 1620 8100 5832 29160
900 x 900 1640 8200 5904 29520
1000 x 900 1820 9100 6552 32760
1000 x 1000 2020 10100 7272 36360
1) Vmin = 0 is also possible 2) Only TVR 3) Not TVRK
6

Volume flow V in %
100 5 5
80 5 5
60 5 6
Vmin Vmax p
40 7 8
20 10 11
TVR / 160 / 00 / PN1 / ZE - 50 - 110 l/s - +10Pa
<20 >10 >11
1) Percentage figures based on Vactual TVA / 160 / 00 / PX1 / AE - 50 - 110 l/s - -25Pa
TVR / 160 / 00 / PV1 / ZF - 75 l/s - -10Pa
Installation point Operating Mode

A Extract Air E Individual
Z Supply Air F Fixed
When ordering, the appertaining master unit must be

indicated as well. The master unit must be of equal size.
Please, consult Trox in case of deviations.
Room Pressure Parameters

p set at required room pressure

Operating
Factory Setting
Mode
Vmin adjustment knob set at required Vmin

E
Vmax adjustment knob set at required Vmax
Vmin adjustment knob set at required V

F
Vmax adjustment knob set at 100 %.
7
Tube Connections RLP 100 F901/F915 Nomenclature
6 Room Pressure Controller

+ Static pressure input from room
1 - Static pressure input from reference room
M 1 Operating pressure input (1.3 bar, 0.1 bar)
2
2 Output set value (0.2 to 1.0 bar)
7 6 Input room pressure set value (0.2 to1.0 bar)
M Output actual room pressure (0.2 to 1.0 bar)
8
Volume Flow Controller
sensor
sensor
1 Operating pressure input (1.3 bar, 0.1 bar)
Tube Connections RLP 100 F003/F004 2 Actuator output (0.2 to 1,0 bar)
6 Set volume flow input (0.2 to 1.0 bar)
6 8 Input set value (0.2 to 1.0 bar)
M Output actual value (0.2 to 1.0 bar)
1
M
2
7 Tube Connections
8 The differential pressure sensor of the volume flow con-
trol unit and the actuator are tube-connected with the
volume flow controller in the factory. The operating pres-
sure has to be connected by the customer. It has to be
IMPORTANT considered that the operating pressure air must meet the
The examples illustrated show the most common requirements for conditioned instrument compressed air
arrangements for volume flow control. The Sauter (free from oil, dust and water).
system design, selection of the other control com- Tube Connections Room Pressure Controller
ponents and wire sizing. Details of other circuits are
available from Sauter. Tube dimensions: di = 6 mm
max. lengths : 10 m (plus and minus in total)1)

For room pressure controls the RLP 100 is tube-con-
nected according to the sketch shown. The measuring
points in the room and reference room must be free from
any turbulences (no influence due to room flow, no dy-
namic share pd).
Reference Room
Note:
Room If room groups with different pressure stages are arran-
ged one behind the other, all transducers shall operate
with a common reference pressure, e.g. atmospheric
pressure.
1) Recommendation
8
Room Temperature and Room Pressure Control Room Temperature Controller

Operating Room with discharging room temperature controllers according
pressure temperature
controller, DW to the tubing plans shown. The volume flow controllers
discharge (blow) compressed air through the input for the
command variable. Thus, the controller can be con-
nected with one connection tube only. The room temper-
ature controller must be dimensioned for the discharge
1 6
volume of the volume flow controller.
RLP 100 (F001/002) Room Pressure Controller

Operating Mode E
The room pressure controller should be assembled close
to the room and/or reference room in order to keep the
Room
tube lengths of the measurement lines short.
Reference room
Parallel Control
1 2 Several volume flow controllers (supply and extract air)
are parallelly controlled by one room temperature con-
RLP 100 Room Pressure troller. The volume flow control units are of equal size and
the Vmin and Vmax adjustment knobs are set to equal
values. For this reason all units have the same volume
flow.
If several controllers are connected to a room tempera-
1 8 6 ture controller, the sum of the discharge amounts of all
volume flow controllers has to be considered. If this
RLP 100 Volume Flow
amount exceeds the maximum air take-back volume of
Operating Mode ZE, AE the room temperature controller, cutoff relays have to be
used.
Operating Pressure Connections

The volume flow controllers RLP 100 can directly be con-
Room Pressure Control (Constant Value) nected to the operating pressure supply as they have an
internal restrictor. If the signal of the room temperature
controller is subdivided to several sequences and a
Operating sequence relay is integrated, an operating pressure sup-
pressure ply must be directed to the room temperature controller.
Here, the correct dimensioning of the restrictor has to be
taken into account, also under consideration of the heat-
Room ing value actuator. If the restriction is too low, disturbing
Reference room discharge noises occur at the room temperature control-
ler.
2 Constant Volume Flow Control

RLP 100 Room Pressure Rooms with constant volume flow can be room-pressure
controlled. If a constant controller (e.g. Trox RN) is instal-
led in the supply air, the room pressure volume flow
cascade has to be in the extract air. This controller com-
pensates room pressure deviations resulting from supply
air tolerances. At constant room extract air the same pro-
8 cedure is used for the supply air.
RLP 100 Volume Flow
Operating Mode ZF, AF
9

For commissioning it is best to first disconnect (remove)
Test tubing Connect the command variable of the room pressure controller
supply compressed air (terminal 8). With the doors open, master and slave con-
Connect air conditioning system troller are set in operation according to Trox product
information (RLE 150, E16MB7). Then reconnect com-
mand variable, shut the doors and check room pressure
(smoke checks).
Check Volume Flow Controller The set value of the room pressure is reached, when the
room pressure determined from the PM measured is in
conformity with the set value. If this is not the case, the
room leakage is too high. The set value has to be re-
duced. If the room proves to be non-air-tight, the room
Check Room Pressure Controller
pressure control cannot function. The room is then to be
taken into operation with the supply air/extract air slave
control.
Fault Finding Check

Operating pressure
no
Operating pressure due

due to Sauter
to Sauter requirements?
requirements?
yes
Damper blocked? Fail
no
Actuator opening
safe direction OK?
and closing? Controller faulty
yes
no
Volume Flow Vmin ? Duct pressure

sufficient?
yes Measurement
tubing to Sensor
no
Volume Flow Vmax ? damaged?
yes
no

control? thermostat
yes
no
Check window

Room Pressure Controller Sauter RLP 100 F 901
preset at +15 Pa
solution. The following must be specified when ordering
Volume Flow Controller Sauter RLP 100 F 003 a replacement controller: Room presure, Vmin and Vmax.
preset for TVA 160
10
Sauter Accessories
1
Subject
Contents
Split Signal Relay

Sequencing Relay
2
2
Page
Sauter Accessories
Sequencing Relay 297510 Sequencing Relay
Area of Application
297510
3 The Sauter 297510 sequencing relay is used in connec-
2
tion with variable volume flow controllers if a split range
of the output signal from the room thermostat is to be
used to control a heating valve in sequence with the vari-
able volume. The room thermostat must give a rise in
pressure signal as the temperature rises (direct acting on
cooling).
Adjustment screw
Output
Function
Input
The full range of pressure sigoal on the room thermostat
of 0.2 to 1.0 bar is set on the input of the sequence relay.
From 0.6 bar input pressure, a double amplified signal is
present at the output according to the diagram shown.
The input is non venting. The room thermostat must be
Characteristic Diagram supplied with operating pressure via an external restric-
tor. The output is fed from the volume flow controller.
1.0
bar
Poutput
0.6
0.2
0.2 0.6 bar 1.0

Pinput Split Signal Relay
Area of Application
Split Signal Relay A split signal relay is used to separate pneumatic signals.
In the control of variable volume flows, the signal is used
for supply/extract air sequential control. The actual vol-
297690 2
ume flow value output of the RLP 10 can only supply a
1 limited amount of air. The relay serves as an amplifier:
1 3
2 another application is the parallel switching of several
VAV terminal units on one room temperature controller. If
3 the capacity of the room temperature controller is ex-
ceeded, the relay is used to create control subgroups.
Free
Output Function
Input The control pressure is always transferred from the input
to the output in the ratio of 1:1. There is no air release
from the input. A ball relief nozzle releases excess pres-
sure on the output side. The maximum air handling capa-
city must be taken into account.
Characteristic Diagram
1.0
bar
Poutput
0.6
0.2
0.2 0.6 bar 1.0

Pinput
2
Trox Pneumatic Actuator
1
Subject
Function
Contents
Application
2
2
Page
Design changes reserved All rights reserved Gebrder Trox GmbH (12/2001) Leaflet No. E016MJ0
Trox Pneumatic Actuator
Pneumatic Actuator Application

Maintenance-free compressed air damper actuator for
VAV terminal units. Controlled by the signal of a pneu-
matic volume flow controller. The actuator is factory-
3 mounted on the terminal unit with pneumatic tubing to
the controller.
2
Function
1 The actuator incorporates a neoprene roll membrane and
thus has no steady state air consumption itself. As the
control pressure rises, the piston rod pushes against a
return spring (stroke approximately 85 mm).
Actuator At control pressure 0 bar the piston rod is retracted. The
Piston rod piston rod drives the damper via a lever. The mechanism
Air pressure connection is factory set such that the full travel of the aetuator is
used for the open to closed movement of the damper. No
travel limiters are required. The direction of action (open
or closed with no pressure) is established by the actuator
mounting position.
Manual adjustment is not possible. Manual withdrawal

of the piston rod can lead to damage. The roll mem-
brane is not under pressure and can stick internally.

Varycontrol Trox - Catalogo Completo

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Varycontrol Trox - Catalogo Completo

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

VARYCONTROL

Design and Areas of Application

Volume Flow Control Terminal Units

TVZ TVA Volume Flow Control Terminal Units

Selection Criterion Terminal Unit Type

System Supply air

TVR Low installation height TVR/TVJ/TVT

Volume flow ranges

To achieve the correct control strategy, various tasks

VAV System with Electronic or Trox Scope of Supply

The scope of supply for VARYCONTROL systems

The following are not included:

The guarantee for the room temperature control system

Trox scope of supply

Guarantee limit between Trox and system

Room Temperature Control Circuit Description of Function

Room Temperature Control Circuit

signal corresponding to the resulting energy requirement

Volume Flow Control Circuit Volume Flow Cascade Control Circuit

1 Volume flow controller

Single Duct with Supply Air / Single Duct System

Suply Air / Extract Air Slave Control

numbers must be given. This allocation must be taken

TVA -R/160/B13/S2-27-225 l/s

Unless specified otherwise, the heating volume is taken

Dual Duct System Dual Duct System

Room Pressure Control Room Pressure Control

The proposed application and positive or negative pres-

Duct Pressure Control Duct Pressure Control

Explanation of Order Codes

Code Make of Volume flow Code Controller/Transmitter Application Code Actuator

B VRP + VFP 300 VAV-Control for polluted air 3 1) NM24-V

J VRP-STP + VFP300 Room- or duct pressure control D 1) GM24-V

2 2 x VRD2 Standard dual duct control 7 2 x NM24-V

TVZ/TVA/TVS/TVR/ Standard VAV-Control, 2 1) GIB131.1E

TVZ/TVA/TVS/TVR/ Standard VAV-Control, A GBB131.1E

Y 2 x GLB181.1E/3 Standard dual duct control 0 2 x compact controller

TVRK/TVJ/TVT Standard VAV-Control,

D RLE150F003 + RLE150F001 Standard dual duct control

B RLP10, NO, PN61

E RLP10, NZ, PN61

N RLP100, NO, PN21

TVZ/TVA/TVS/TVR/ P RLP100, NO, PN61 Standard VAV-Control,

P S RLP100, NZ, PN61

U RLP100 (NO, PN21) + RLP100

V RLP100 (NZ, PN21) + RLP100

Y RLP100 (NZ, PN21) + RLP100

1 2 x RLP10 (NO, PN21) Standard dual duct control

TVM 2 2 x RLP10, (NZ, PN21) Standard dual duct control 4 2 x B555DC2

1) for TVT only; depending of necessary torque, selected by Trox

TVZ . TVA Delivery and Storage

1 Trox differential pressure sensor

Reheat Coil Connections Fixing

Wiring and Tubing Connections

TVJ with TX TVJ/TVT with Silencer TX

TVJ/TVJD, H = 1001) mm, with TX Unit with 1001) mm Height

1) Also valid for the former height 107 mm

Disengaging the Drive Function Test

Control Damper Actuator Volume Flow Controllers and Transducers

C-Values TVZ, TVS, TVR, TVM and TVA Transducer Curve

1 Remove test point cap and replace after

TVRK Volume Flow Controller and Transducer

The accuracy for the measurement is 7 %.

Effective Pressure Sensors